(ange-ftp-file-modtime): Don't use `caddr'.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
c6f01e00
MB
44** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
45To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
46`auto-compression-mode' command.
47
4c724b32
DL
48** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
49`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
50
b856f39c 51+++
068127d6
GM
52** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
53operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
54
fd06c7da
MB
55** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
56(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
57remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
58may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
59
8ac08dea 60+++
62c273d7
DL
61** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
62is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
63
64+++
65** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
66mode `iswitchb-mode'.
67
8ac08dea 68+++
f393cf90
DL
69** Gnus changes.
70
71The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
72four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
73internationalization and mail-fetching.
74
75*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
76many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
77
78If you used procmail like in
79
80(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
81(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
82(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
83(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
84
327652be 85this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
86
87(setq mail-sources
88 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
89 :suffix ".in")))
90
91More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
92Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
93
94*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
95Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
96Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
97probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 98
60dd7e0e 99*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
100parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
101are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
102now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
103
104*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
105called to position point.
106
107*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
108summary buffers and NOV files.
109
110*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
111of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
112
113*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
114subtly different manner.
115
116*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
117and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
118ever-changing layouts.
119
120*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
121
122*** There is image support.
123
124** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1258859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
126more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
127empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
128window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
129on.
130
ba9eeda1
GM
131** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
132set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
133file that is already visited under a different name.
134
42ac0ae5
GM
135** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
136nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
137
138** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
139recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
140signaled.
141
ba9eeda1 142** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
143support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
144use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
145buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
146M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
147new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
148
b941a14b 149+++
ba9eeda1 150** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 151and displays information about that.
b941a14b 152
ba9eeda1 153** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
154file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
155
d7b38c05 156** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 157added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
158Postscript files are included.
159
160** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
161`dired-ref.tex'.
162
25ad1371
GM
163** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
164expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
165
166This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
167determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
168mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
169interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
170regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
171associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
172
b856f39c 173+++
f0298744
DL
174** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
175displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
176menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
177menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
178
9a8d84ca
DL
179** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
180a version-dependent component.
181
d76c03ea
GM
182** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
183Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
184will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
185character is still bound as before.
186
3b4fa1b2
DL
187** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
188using that menu.
189
40e857ea 190** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 191suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 192
beb2eb00 193+++
c08398de
DL
194** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
195buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
196contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
197by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
198insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
199the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
200Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
201
db7a3ede 202+++
3d6cd763
GM
203** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
204coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
205escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
206such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
207recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 208always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 209read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
210(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
211RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 212
0b8a3a6d
DL
213** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
214environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
215
424d8b44 216+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
217** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
218point in a pop-up window.
219
6d35b49f 220+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
221** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
222displays all characters in that character set.
223
224** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
225coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
226
a4067978 227+++
5cb6a58e 228** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 229on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
230defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
231commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 232
424d8b44 233+++
a1b8d58b
GM
234** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
235
6e417ca5
DL
236** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
237been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
238
424d8b44 239+++
5898e075
DL
240** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
241`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
242indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
243indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
244
424d8b44 245+++
abfcc168
GM
246** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
247sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 248(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
249You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
250
424d8b44 251+++
cc181e95
GM
252** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
253on the display using several methods
254
424d8b44 255+++
cc181e95
GM
256- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
257a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
258be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
259
424d8b44 260+++
cc181e95
GM
261- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
262equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
263
da4496b6 264- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
265
266- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
267the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
268
424d8b44 269+++
3b4fa1b2 270** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 271an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 272command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 273does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 274
424d8b44 275+++
176256a1 276** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
277`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
278typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 279
dd0add8e
DL
280** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
281characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
282
bf3ba9ac 283+++
699238d9
GM
284** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
285compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
286this behavior.
287
288The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
289compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
290Emacs dump core.
291
424d8b44 292+++
699238d9 293** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 294
7233c5bd
GM
295*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
296whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
297is useful for debugging X problems.
298
299Example:
300
699238d9 301 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 302
100b3cbb
GM
303*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
304visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
305the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
306and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
307visual class names are
308
309 TrueColor
310 PseudoColor
311 DirectColor
312 StaticColor
313 GrayScale
314 StaticGray
315
316Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
317`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
318meaning.
319
320The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
321supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
322`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
323visual.
324
325Example:
326
699238d9 327 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
328
329*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
330specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
331default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
332resource values are `true' or `on'.
333
334Example:
335
699238d9 336 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 337
0d0c76b8
EZ
338** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
339more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
340now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
341
42088c12 342** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 343display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
344shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
345be customized.
c60ea02e 346
424d8b44 347+++
31047e0d
DL
348** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
349
424d8b44 350+++
b02786f9
GM
351** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
352all frames except the selected one.
353
3261c1d8
DL
354** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
355to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
356
ffe36136 357** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
358the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
359MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
360displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
361
0292b49f 362+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
363** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
364MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 365
559cee90
DL
366** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
367read mail from the menu etc.
368
480b5773 369+++
271b4185
GM
370** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
371a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
372
0daee095
GM
373** Changes in Texinfo mode.
374
a5e350c9 375*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
376macros
377
378 Key binding Macro
379 -------------------------
380 C-c C-c C-s @strong
381 C-c C-c C-e @emph
a5e350c9 382 C-c C-c u @url
0daee095 383 C-c C-c q @quotation
a5e350c9
SM
384 C-c C-c m @email
385 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
386 M-RET @item
387
388*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 389
559cee90
DL
390** Changes in Outline mode.
391
392There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
393`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
394the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
395
327652be 396** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 397
c0a8c108
EZ
398+++
399*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
400with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
401are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
402Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
403buffers to kill, as before.
404
405Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 406i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
407this way.
408
956777b3
GM
409** Changes to Show Paren mode.
410
411*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
412The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
413use. Default is 1000.
414
f6989277 415+++
404fa7d6
DL
416** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
417groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
418
424d8b44
DL
419+++
420** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
421M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
422M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
423buffers.
8964fec7 424
424d8b44 425+++
39783d73
WP
426** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
427under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
428.emacs file.
429
430The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
431determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
432
d35fce81
GM
433** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
434abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
435`directory-abbrev-alist'.
436
a933dad1
DL
437** Faces and frame parameters.
438
439There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
440Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
441`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
442`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
443sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
444for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
445parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
446
447Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
448`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 449`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
450`default' face and vice versa.
451
d80061fa 452+++
f77a4a8a
GM
453** New face `menu'.
454
455The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
456Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
457attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
458
424d8b44 459+++
a933dad1
DL
460** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
461
462The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
463colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
464correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
465the screen gamma of a frame's display.
466
467PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
468in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
469color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
470
471The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
472`ScreenGamma'.
473
474** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
475
476The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
477Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
478oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
479of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
480the text.
481
482** Emacs has a new face implementation.
483
484The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
485font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
486height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
487These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
488specify a font.
489
490Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
491These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
492under Lisp changes, below.
493
494** New default font is Courier 12pt.
495
424d8b44
DL
496+++
497** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
498of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
499otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
500
501** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
502truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
503foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
504customizing face `fringe'.
505
506** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
507can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
508
509** LessTif support.
510
424d8b44
DL
511Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
512You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
513
514** Toolkit scroll bars.
515
516Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
517LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
518configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
519bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
520bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
521Emacs.
522
523When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
524Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
525Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
526Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
527define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
528`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
529
530Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
531a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
532directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
533different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
534system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
535add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
536
537The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
538`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
539This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
540image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
541Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
542
543** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
544
545When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
546widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
547Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
548
424d8b44 549+++
a933dad1
DL
550** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
551
552When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
553whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
554defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
555highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
556displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
557whitespace.
558
6e612d4d 559+++
a933dad1
DL
560** Busy-cursor.
561
562Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
563display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
564
424d8b44 565+++
a933dad1
DL
566** Blinking cursor
567
568M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
569terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
570and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
571the group `cursor'.
572
8ac08dea 573+++
a933dad1
DL
574** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
575
576This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
577generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
578See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
579details.
580
581Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
582have to do anything to activate it.
583
584** Tabs and variable-width text.
585
586Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
587defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
588independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
589Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
590
591** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
592
424d8b44 593+++
a933dad1
DL
594*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
595
596 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
597
79dd1637
RS
598The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
599LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 600
79dd1637
RS
601*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
602LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 603
34d90e29 604+++
a933dad1
DL
605** Hscrolling in C code.
606
cc181e95
GM
607Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
608`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
609customized.
a933dad1 610
8ac08dea 611+++
a933dad1
DL
612** Tool bar support.
613
614Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
615of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
616changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
8628686a
DL
617displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
618need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
619assignments).
a933dad1 620
424d8b44 621+++
a933dad1
DL
622** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
623
624Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
625mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
626line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
627about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
628in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
629
630Currently, the following actions have been defined:
631
632- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
633buffers.
634
635- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
636M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
637
638- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
639
424d8b44
DL
640- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
641`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
642
643- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
644
645** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
646
647When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 648from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
649non-nil.
650
651** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
652
653Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
654Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
655the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
656italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
657Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
658attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
659on terminals.
a933dad1 660
54a9404d
EZ
661The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
662supported on character terminals.
663
a933dad1
DL
664** Sound support
665
2f516940 666Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 667driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 668supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 669
424d8b44 670+++
a933dad1
DL
671** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
672the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
673forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
674value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
675users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
676even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
677
678The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
679
0e18b431 680+++
a933dad1
DL
681** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
682
683As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
684drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
685`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
686
fdd8bb68 687+++
a933dad1
DL
688** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
689bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
690
691This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
692`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
693variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
694
c5d00c64 695+++
a933dad1
DL
696** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
697
698When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
699value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
700number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 701fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
702
703When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
704value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
705number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 706fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
707
708** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
709notably at the end of lines.
710
711All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
712spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
713
424d8b44 714+++
eee54b0e
DL
715There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
716
a933dad1
DL
717** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
718query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
719after each match to get the replacement text.
720
00782214 721+++
d5483ab1
GM
722** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
723you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 724
424d8b44 725** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
726you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
727lisp-complete-symbol.
728
7af69644 729+++
a933dad1
DL
730** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
731
163ea954 732If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
733longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
734is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
735minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
736
737- User option: max-mini-window-height
738
739Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
740fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 741specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
742
743Default is 0.25.
744
a299a6f0
GM
745- User option: resize-mini-windows
746
747How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
748resize ot fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
749grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
750again.
751
752Default is `grow-only'.
753
2f72fd2f
GM
754** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
755
0d43b60d
GM
756** Changes to hideshow.el
757
758Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
759selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
760conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
761
762*** Generalized block selection and traversal
763
764A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
765(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
766which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
767`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
768point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
769(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
770
771If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
772i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
773backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
774the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
775
776*** Isearch support for updating mode line
777
778During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
779blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
780line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
781portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
782is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
783
784To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
785something like this in your .emacs.
786
787 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
788 (lambda ()
789 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
790
327652be
TTN
791*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
792
793Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
794header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
795`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
796moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
797block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
798behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
799useful.
800
801You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
802function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
803of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
804code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
805appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
806
807(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
808 (hs-hide-level 1)
809 (forward-sexp 1))
810(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
811
812The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
813emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
814only for code blocks.
815
816*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
817
818Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
819parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
820display for implementation.
821
822*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
823
824The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
825LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
826which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
827new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
828
829 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
830 hs-show-block C-c C-s
831 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
832 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
833 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
834 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
835 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
836
837These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
838
559cee90
DL
839** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
840
424d8b44 841+++
1b24b888
GM
842*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
843an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
844log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
845
424d8b44 846+++
1b24b888
GM
847**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
848current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
849
850+++
1b24b888
GM
851*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
852in a log file.
eb2aac9d 853
502004be 854+++
1b24b888
GM
855*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
856entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 857
502004be 858+++
1b24b888 859*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
860version number is performed based on regular expressions from
861`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
862Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 863
2c63c979 864*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 865
79c78e77
GM
866** Changes to cmuscheme
867
868*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
869`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
870
3476b54a
GM
871** Changes in Font Lock
872
873*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 874font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 875
2c63c979
SM
876*** multiline patterns are now supported.
877
a5e350c9
SM
878*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
879the face used for each string/comment.
880
b3b98592
GM
881** Comint (subshell) changes
882
988cded7
MB
883These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
884include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
885
886*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
887to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
888parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
889user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
890this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
891respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
892feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
893`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
894
895*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
896and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
897
988cded7 898*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
899buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
900buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
901
902The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
903M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
904the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
905
988cded7
MB
906*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
907and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
908see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 909
988cded7 910*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
911saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
912argument, it appends to the file.
913
988cded7 914*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
915(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
916compatibility.
917
0e40b809
EL
918*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
919ring (history).
d648cc45 920
e26cec67
GM
921** Changes to Rmail mode
922
c0510d27
GM
923*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
924set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
925receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
926recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
927`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
928as correspondent.
929
930Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
931mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 932regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 933
3b55acc9
GM
934*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
935to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
936Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
937with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
938for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
939
6a1950ec
GM
940*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
941like `j'.
942
5bb6f079
RS
943*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
944specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 945digest message.
e26cec67 946
993d8b7d
DL
947*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
948in which folder to put messages automatically.
949
400a1ed0
GM
950** Changes to TeX mode
951
a5e350c9 952*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
953`latex-mode'.
954
a5e350c9
SM
955*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
956
957*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
958
959*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
960
a933dad1
DL
961** Changes to RefTeX mode
962
963*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
964 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
965 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
966 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
967 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
968 can be edited from that buffer.
969
970*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
971 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
972 `A' to use all marked entries).
973
974*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
975 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
976
977*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
978 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
979 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
980 been cited.
981
38de9631
GM
982** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
983The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
984semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
985in column 1 are always made leaves.
986
a933dad1
DL
987** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
988has the following new features:
989
990*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
991may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
992to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
993time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
994
995*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
996feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
997file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
998compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
999pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1000defaults to 1.
1001
5d94f558 1002** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1003file names.
1004
424d8b44 1005+++
a933dad1
DL
1006** Tooltips.
1007
1008Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
1009mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
1010can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
1011
1012Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1013variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1014the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1015tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1016
424d8b44 1017+++
a933dad1
DL
1018** Customize changes
1019
1020*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1021`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1022cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1023
1024*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1025Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1026default).
1027
0ae51efb
GM
1028*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1029between custom options. Example:
1030
1031 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1032 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1033 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1034 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1035 :group 'mule
1036 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1037 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1038
1039This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1040current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1041first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1042
a933dad1
DL
1043** New features in evaluation commands
1044
5e03eb84 1045*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1046modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1047print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1048customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1049eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1050
5e03eb84
GM
1051*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1052code when called with a prefix argument.
1053
ead53494
GM
1054** Ispell changes
1055
37d8a691 1056+++
bbe15990
EZ
1057*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1058transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1059spell-checks the current buffer.
1060
37d8a691 1061+++
385ff9e3
GM
1062*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1063added.
1064
1065*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1066correction is made and re-checked.
1067
74ec6045 1068*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1069
1070*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1071cases.
1072
1073*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1074on syntax errors.
1075
1076*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1077end of the buffer.
1078
a933dad1
DL
1079** Dired changes
1080
1081*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1082command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1083is, delete only empty directories.
1084
1085*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1086command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1087copy directories recursively.
1088
f6737cde
GM
1089*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1090in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1091the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1092
2f72fd2f
GM
1093*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1094replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1095directory.
1096
7381ae05
MB
1097*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1098a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1099This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1100will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1101accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1102
e024b101
GM
1103*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1104from ls switches.
1105
60b392a7
MB
1106*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1107of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1108which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1109source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1110
a933dad1
DL
1111** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1112use the -f option when sending mail.
1113
b1c609b1
GM
1114** CC mode changes.
1115
1116Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1117current user setups (although it's believed that these
1118incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1119However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1120back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1121compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1122release.
1123
7972fcfc
GM
1124*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1125This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1126of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1127non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1128want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1129have to bother.
1130
1131Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1132situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1133and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1134If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1135the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1136by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1137
b1c609b1
GM
1138*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1139When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1140variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1141take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1142is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1143settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1144possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1145Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1146
1147By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1148special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1149the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1150of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1151above.
1152
1153Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1154when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1155function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1156call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1157then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1158values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1159only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1160function documentation for more info.
1161
1162The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1163especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1164with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1165intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1166such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1167is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1168configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1169global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1170
1171(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1172
1173**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1174This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1175
1176This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1177variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1178completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1179the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1180empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1181style system.
1182
1183**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1184In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1185c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1186as far as possible.
1187
1188*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1189CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1190surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1191chapter about this in the manual.
1192
1193**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1194The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1195recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1196primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1197adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1198
1199**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1200This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1201c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1202
1203**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1204This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1205
1206It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1207Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1208A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1209inside CC Mode.
1210
1211Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1212causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1213the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1214available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1215cc-mode/).
1216
1217**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1218The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1219specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1220literals.
1221
1222**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1223It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1224prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1225you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1226this function.
1227
1228*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1229It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1230to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1231struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1232Thanks to Eric Eide.
1233
1234*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1235It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1236opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1237
1238**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1239
1240*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1241See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1242better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1243and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1244
1245*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1246previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1247the column specified by comment-column.
1248
1249*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1250In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1251is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1252prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1253contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1254don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1255
1256*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1257instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1258arguments.
1259
1260*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1261
1262*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1263c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1264c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1265variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1266Provan).
1267
1268*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1269
c407c570
GM
1270** Makefile mode changes
1271
1272*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1273
5d94f558 1274*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1275Fontlock mode is active.
1276
87be76f6
GM
1277** Isearch changes
1278
3353ef5a
GM
1279*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1280so that searches can be resumed.
1281
1282*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1283respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1284that started the search.
1285
87be76f6 1286*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1287selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1288
c8a8458a 1289+++
87be76f6
GM
1290*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1291
d35fce81 1292Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1293`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1294search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1295before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1296highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1297`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1298
1299The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1300will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1301Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1302using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1303usual snappy response.
1304
1305If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1306matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1307set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1308isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1309
21bc6203 1310+++
35384f06
GM
1311** Changes in sort.el
1312
1313The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1314as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1315new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1316numeric base.
87be76f6 1317
d7b511c4
GM
1318** Changes to Ange-ftp
1319
424d8b44 1320+++
d7b511c4 1321*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1322names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1323sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1324
d7b511c4
GM
1325*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1326ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1327
9d453139
SS
1328*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1329output ^M at the end of lines.
1330
4b9347b3
GM
1331** Shell script mode changes.
1332
1333Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1334derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1335sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1336
79214ddf
FP
1337** Etags changes.
1338
1339*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1340
aca0be23 1341*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1342possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1343{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1344This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1345a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1346
79214ddf
FP
1347*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1348declarations when given the --declarations option.
1349
1350*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1351"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1352
1353*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1354types.
1355
de370c4c 1356*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1357
1358*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1359
1360*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1361are now tagged.
1362
1363*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1364variables are tagged.
1365
1366*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1367
8dc78b52
FP
1368*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1369for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1370
c8d94f86 1371+++
f6737cde
GM
1372** Changes in etags.el
1373
3f6e4b8b
GM
1374*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1375tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1376is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1377
f6737cde
GM
1378*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1379the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1380
1381If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1382FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1383TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1384obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1385
1386TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1387
1388FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1389List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1390
1391A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1392
1393 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1394 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1395 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1396
1397*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1398of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1399
1400*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1401names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1402
424d8b44 1403+++
fbc164de
PE
1404** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1405and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1406LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1407
c3eb1f10 1408+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1409** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1410Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14118859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1412GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14138859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1414releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1415(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1416
424d8b44 1417+++
163ea954 1418** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1419remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1420appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1421
1422** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1423
424d8b44 1424+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1425** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1426
6ab8d72d 1427+++
f6499c03 1428** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1429containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1430expression from that list, are not checked.
1431
5d94f558
SS
1432** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1433When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1434and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1435the buffer, just like for the local files.
1436
dc28878c
GM
1437** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1438
df8a9f78 1439+++
95931eb1
GM
1440** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1441displays local abbrevs, only.
1442
54baed30
GM
1443** VC Changes
1444
1445VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1446easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1447Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1448to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1449changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1450`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1451version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1452each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1453file is registered in that backend.
1454
1455When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1456backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1457directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1458master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1459the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1460As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1461
1462The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1463still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1464RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1465vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1466where it doesn't make sense.)
1467
1468The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1469obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1470`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1471
1472*** General Changes
1473
1474The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1475checks are always done now.
1476
327652be 1477VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1478operations.
1479
c286608e
SM
1480`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1481`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1482`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1483
54baed30
GM
1484*** Changes for CVS
1485
1486There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1487default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1488remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1489by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1490regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1491that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1492queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1493
1494If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1495repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1496If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1497commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1498current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1499entire directory tree.
1500
1501The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1502"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1503is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1504"watched" by other developers.)
1505
1506*** Lisp Changes in VC
1507
1508VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1509add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1510library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1511then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1512a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1513provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1514of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1515you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1516`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1517
a933dad1
DL
1518** New modes and packages
1519
4473cdd9
JW
1520+++
1521*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1522implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1523It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1524functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1525history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1526will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1527the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1528rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1529all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1530
ff332647 1531+++
90cbf47e
GM
1532*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1533intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1534typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1535on certain projects.
1536
894ca69e 1537+++
90cbf47e 1538*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1539regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1540
d96d6bb0 1541 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1542
1543will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1544face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1545typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1546Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1547appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1548current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1549corresponding file is read.
1550
424d8b44 1551+++
d96d6bb0 1552*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1553Emacs is idle.
1554
31fc5d15
GM
1555*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1556parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1557
5cb6a58e
SM
1558*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1559package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1560be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1561
424d8b44 1562+++
578979ee
GM
1563*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1564facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1565separate Texinfo file.
1566
424d8b44
DL
1567+++
1568*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1569by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1570provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1571`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1572enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1573
424d8b44 1574+++
6abca616
EZ
1575*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1576without invoking external programs.
1577
1578The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1579and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1580`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1581is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1582Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1583
1584The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1585page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1586
719e2c6e 1587+++
5e5dff44
GM
1588*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1589authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1590
1591The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1592the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1593the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1594Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1595even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1596single step.
1597
1598On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1599matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1600probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1601contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1602
424d8b44 1603+++
f7136ee8
GM
1604*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1605unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1606actually modifying content of a buffer.
1607
bbd9b566
GM
1608*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1609PostScript.
1610
1611Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1612
1613The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1614
1615 ; comment (until end of line)
1616 A non-terminal
1617 "C" terminal
1618 ?C? special
1619 $A default non-terminal
1620 $"C" default terminal
1621 $?C? default special
1622 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1623 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1624 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1625 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1626 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1627 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1628 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1629 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1630 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1631 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1632 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1633 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1634 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1635 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1636 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1637
1638Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1639
99453a38
GM
1640*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1641align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1642determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1643example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1644equal signs of assignments.
1645
424d8b44 1646+++
559cee90
DL
1647*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1648paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1649
424d8b44 1650+++
6448a6b3
GM
1651*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1652list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1653buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1654customize the package.
1655
6344985d
GM
1656*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1657
249652b1
GM
1658*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1659replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1660is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1661and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1662not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1663which answers different needs.
1664
424d8b44 1665+++
3476b54a
GM
1666*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1667suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1668expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1669course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1670reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1671to be enabled.
1672
424d8b44 1673+++
8964fec7
SM
1674*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1675containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1676
424d8b44 1677+++
a933dad1
DL
1678*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1679
424d8b44 1680+++
a933dad1
DL
1681*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1682
1683*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1684
8901d1ac
GM
1685Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1686`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1687disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1688`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1689displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1690and background colors.
1691
a933dad1
DL
1692*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1693Pascal) language.
1694
f6499c03 1695+++
a933dad1
DL
1696*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1697the text at point.
1698
1699*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1700
424d8b44 1701+++
8d54eb69
DL
1702*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1703
a933dad1
DL
1704*** whitespace.el ???
1705
ebcfda83
GM
1706*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1707files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1708(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1709interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1710often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1711uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1712codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1713
1714*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1715
1716Here is an example of columns:
1717
1718horse apple bus
1719dog pineapple car EXTRA
1720porcupine strawberry airplane
1721
1722Doing the following settings:
1723
1724 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1725 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1726 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1727 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1728
1729
1730Selecting the lines above and typing:
1731
1732 M-x delimit-columns-region
1733
1734It results:
1735
1736[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1737[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1738[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1739
1740delim-col has the following options:
1741
1742 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1743 before all columns.
1744
1745 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1746 between each column.
1747
1748 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1749 after all columns.
1750
1751 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1752 each column.
1753
1754delim-col has the following commands:
1755
1756 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1757 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1758
424d8b44 1759+++
f507826c 1760*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1761were operated on recently.
1762
1763M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1764
31fc5d15
GM
1765M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1766recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1767
31fc5d15
GM
1768M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1769filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1770file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1771
31fc5d15
GM
1772- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1773- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1774- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1775
31fc5d15
GM
1776The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1777dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1778
8062f458
DL
1779*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1780text.
1781
424d8b44 1782+++
36e24b82 1783*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1784of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1785specific to Message mode.
1786
424d8b44 1787+++
36e24b82
DL
1788*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1789viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1790with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1791
424d8b44 1792+++
aaa659ef
DL
1793*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1794interface to access directory servers using different directory
1795protocols. It has a separate manual.
1796
eee54b0e
DL
1797*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1798for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1799
424d8b44 1800+++
612839b6
GM
1801*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1802
5d94f558 1803*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1804minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1805
399da7e3
DL
1806*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1807with the diary features.
1808
6e417ca5
DL
1809*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1810numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1811
4a27bdfb
GM
1812*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1813Fill mode.
1814
60dd7e0e
DL
1815*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1816Gnus facilities.
1817
dace60cf
JW
1818*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1819facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1820difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1821they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1822
965bc065
DL
1823+++
1824** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1825paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1826
1827+++
1828** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1829to be visited as images.
1830
a933dad1
DL
1831** Withdrawn packages
1832
1833*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1834functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1835
3261c1d8
DL
1836*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1837
1838*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1839
1840\f
1841* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1842(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1843
52d89894
GM
1844+++
1845** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
1846alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
1847
4301cf66
DL
1848** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
1849currently using the `md5sum' program.
1850
6bc92b2e
GM
1851** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
1852deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
1853being deleted.
1854
39e776cd
SM
1855** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
1856
a18a342d 1857+++
1396138a 1858** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
1859If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
1860skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
1861with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
1862C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
1863charset.
1864
4fbdfdcf
MB
1865+++
1866** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1867the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1868message.
1869
6a0b0752
MB
1870** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1871expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1872
47e351a3
GM
1873** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1874with the more general `:mask' property.
1875
ba9eeda1
GM
1876** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1877
a2bd77b8
GM
1878** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1879backslash.
1880
424d8b44
DL
1881+++
1882** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1883is running in batch mode. For example,
1884
1885 (message "%s" (read t))
1886
1887will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1888to standard output.
1889
1890+++
1891** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1892`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1893
ead53494
GM
1894** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1895will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1896frame or window.
1897
f6499c03 1898+++
27848c01
GM
1899** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1900were added
1901
1902- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1903
1904Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1905a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1906
1907- Function: remq ELT LIST
1908
1909Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1910comparison is done with `eq'.
1911
1912** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1913
b548072f
GM
1914** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1915has been changed.
1916
424d8b44 1917+++
07b14857
KH
1918** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1919without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1920convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1921
9662da0b
GM
1922** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1923or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1924
7fce7efb
DL
1925** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1926function was declared obsolete.
1927
5d94f558 1928** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1929retained as an alias).
1930
f98d3086
SM
1931** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1932It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1933is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1934
87efd256
GM
1935** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1936
1937- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1938
1939Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1940MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1941
67c9a1d2
GM
1942** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1943
1944- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1945
1946Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1947
1948This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1949calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1950argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1951value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1952returned.
1953
1954Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1955if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1956it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1957minibuffer even if it is active.
1958
1959Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1960counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1961too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1962and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1963`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1964entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1965
1966ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1967ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1968ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1969ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1970ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1971If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1972Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1973
ead53494
GM
1974** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1975event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1976argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1977
25fa6deb
GM
1978** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1979call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1980message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1981Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1982
5d94f558 1983** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1984meaning no limit.
1985
5d94f558 1986** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1987coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1988DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1989
80c05bd3 1990** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1991of a primitive.
1992
c286608e
SM
1993** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
1994
80c05bd3
DL
1995** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1996buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1997This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1998than replacing the local map.
1999
4bc7a543
DL
2000** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2001after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2002
2003** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2004
f6499c03 2005+++
c286608e
SM
2006** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2007as promised long ago.
f0298744 2008
5d94f558 2009** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2010\f
2011* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2012
2013Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2014--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2015When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2016so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2017
85c75536
MB
2018*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2019buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2020the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2021restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2022
0b8a3a6d
DL
2023*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2024`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2025when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2026multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2027
2028*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2029`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2030contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2031
2032*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2033changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2034[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2035regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2036the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2037extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2038bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2039eight-bit-graphic.
2040
2041** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2042
2043A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2044a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2045character set as previously.
2046
2047*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2048They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2049modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2050
2051CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2052characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2053range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2054case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2055
2056FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2057name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2058
2059*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2060registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2061"fontset-default".
2062
2063*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2064argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2065
2066** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2067composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2068buffers and strings.
2069
2070*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2071character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2072code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2073have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2074composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2075composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2076The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2077also been deleted.
2078
2079*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2080specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2081`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2082
2083*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2084MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2085composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2086may differ between buffer and string text.
2087
2088*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2089COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2090
2091*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2092directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2093Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2094`composition' from STRING.
2095
2096*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2097a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2098
2099*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2100obsolete.
2101
965bc065 2102** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2103`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2104for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2105U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2106
2107** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2108`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2109X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2110
2111+++
2112** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2113are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 21140xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2115
399da7e3 2116+++
f0124b4a
DL
2117** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2118that offset in the file before writing.
2119
f98d3086
SM
2120** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2121compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2122
612839b6
GM
2123** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2124`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2125from which the command was issued.
2126
2127** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2128`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2129`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2130additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2131operate on.
2132
271b4185
GM
2133** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2134to `window-buffer-height'.
2135
2136- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2137
2138Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2139The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2140lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2141
2142Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2143respectively.
2144
2145If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2146COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2147
2148The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2149obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2150on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2151
2152Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2153buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2154possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2155is currently displayed in some window.
2156
3c30cb6e
DL
2157** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2158argument function's results.
2159
62f20204
GM
2160** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2161signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2162
c0510d27 2163** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2164header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2165
2166** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2167ignores differences in case and text representation.
2168
2169** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2170cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2171as follows:
2172
2173 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2174 nil don't display a cursor
2175 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2176 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2177 others display a box cursor.
2178
9a0dd3dc
GM
2179** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2180an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2181defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2182set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2183
d7b511c4 2184** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2185specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2186the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2187text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2188
2189Example:
2190
2191 (string-to-syntax "()")
2192 => (4 . 41)
2193
1fa28578
GM
2194** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2195other than 10.
2196
2197*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2198INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2199
5d94f558 2200 #b1111
1fa28578 2201 => 15
5d94f558 2202 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2203 => -15
2204
2205*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2206
5d94f558 2207 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2208 => 438
2209
2210*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2211
5d94f558 2212 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2213 => 48815
2214
2215*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2216
5d94f558 2217 #2R-111
1fa28578 2218 => -7
5d94f558 2219 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2220 => 267
2221
3d4ff2dd 2222** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2223the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2224and isn't a string.
2225
3d4ff2dd
GM
2226** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2227a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2228value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2229not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2230
16ce590d
DL
2231+++
2232** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2233
73825616 2234** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2235for a regexp in a string.
2236
2237** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2238`mouse-position-function'.
2239
723e779c
GM
2240** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2241that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2242
d1e103b2
GM
2243** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2244Keywords are now always considered constants.
2245
31047e0d
DL
2246+++
2247** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2248returns it.
2249
7a85e4df
GM
2250** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2251returned by function `recent-keys'.
2252
02b14400
RS
2253+++
2254** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2255can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2256Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2257etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2258mode.
404fa7d6 2259
02b14400 2260+++
8964fec7
SM
2261** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2262and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2263
02b14400
RS
2264+++
2265** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2266has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2267function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2268returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2269been performed."
2270
2271When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2272and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2273hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2274then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2275
02b14400 2276+++
81da8b32
GM
2277** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2278In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2279and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2280
02b14400 2281+++
9e207b90
GM
2282** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2283with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2284specified table.
2285
2286 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2287
2288Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2289TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2290saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2291what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2292
02b14400 2293+++
d7f89643 2294** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2295Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2296
02b14400 2297+++
dde9e75a
GM
2298** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2299removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2300
02b14400 2301+++
9da30515
GM
2302** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2303instead of being optional.
2304
02b14400 2305+++
d20679eb
GM
2306** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2307modify read-only text.
2308
02b14400 2309+++
fbc164de
PE
2310** New functions and variables for locales.
2311
2312The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2313decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2314time functions like strftime. The new variables
2315`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2316locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2317
2318The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2319environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2320the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2321environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2322not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2323`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2324`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2325
02b14400 2326+++
863476d1
SM
2327** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2328To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2329modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2330start sequences.
2331
02b14400 2332+++
ef6d912c
GM
2333** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2334because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2335
02b14400 2336+++
a933dad1
DL
2337** New function `propertize'
2338
2339The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2340strings with text properties.
2341
2342- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2343
2344Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2345by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2346PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2347specified value of that property. Example:
2348
2349 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2350
2351+++
2352** push and pop macros.
2353
02b14400
RS
2354Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2355are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2356as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2357
2358(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2359(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2360 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2361
02b14400
RS
2362** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2363
6c7fd5aa
RS
2364Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2365are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2366
2367(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2368 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2369 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2370 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2371
2372(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2373 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2374 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2375 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2376
a933dad1
DL
2377+++
2378** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2379as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2380
2381[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2382[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2383[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2384[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2385[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2386 space, and DEL.
2387[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2388 and DEL.
2389[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2390 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2391 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2392[:alpha:] matches letters.
2393 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2394 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2395[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2396[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2397[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2398[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2399 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2400 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2401[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2402[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2403[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2404
2405+++
2406** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2407
2408The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2409
2410- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2411
2412The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2413are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2414
2415:test TEST
2416
2417TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2418Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2419it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2420
2421:size SIZE
2422
2423SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2424many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2425
2426:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2427
2428REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2429full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2430size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
24311.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2432old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2433
2434:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2435
2436THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2437hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2438(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2439
2440:weakness WEAK
2441
b548072f
GM
2442WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2443`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2444`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2445collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2446outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2447
2448- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2449
2450Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2451
2452- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2453
2454Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2455
2456- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2457
2458Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2459values are shared.
2460
2461- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2462
2463Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2464
2465- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2466
2467Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2468
2469- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2470
2471Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2472
2473- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2474
2475Returns the size of TABLE.
2476
d96d6bb0 2477- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2478
2479Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2480
2481- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2482
2483Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2484
2485- Function: clrhash TABLE
2486
2487Clear TABLE.
2488
2489- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2490
2491Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2492not found.
2493
79214ddf 2494- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2495
2496Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2497another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2498
2499- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2500
2501Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2502
2503- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2504
2505Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2506arguments KEY and VALUE.
2507
2508- Function: sxhash OBJ
2509
2510Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2511
2512- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2513
2514Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2515a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2516comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2517and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2518of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2519
2520TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2521
2522HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2523code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2524integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2525
2526Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2527be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2528
2529 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2530 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2531
2532 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2533 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2534
79214ddf 2535 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2536 'case-fold-string-hash))
2537
2538 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2539
2540+++
2541** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2542
2543It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2544circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2545a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2546
2547+++
2548** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2549
2550If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2551#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2552
a933dad1
DL
2553+++
2554** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2555t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2556specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2557is too short to reach that column.
2558
2559+++
2560** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2561now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2562after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2563two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2564
2565If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2566perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2567and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2568
2569+++
2570** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2571to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2572
2573+++
2574** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2575calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2576
2577+++
2578** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2579directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2580small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2581small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2582temporary-file-directory instead.
2583
2584+++
2585** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2586the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2587`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2588hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2589
2590+++
2591** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2592elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2593
2594+++
2595** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2596
2597make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2598creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2599ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2600
2601+++
2602** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2603
2604The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2605on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2606is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2607never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2608ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2609overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2610
2611If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2612that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2613to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2614The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2615
2616+++
2617** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2618
2619Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2620If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2621ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2622result string.
2623
2624Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2625string where arguments appear in the result string.
2626
2627Example:
2628
2629 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2630 (s2 "world"))
2631 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2632 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2633 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2634
2635results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2636
2637+++
2638** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2639
2640Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2641The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2642argument in it.
2643
2644 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2645 (arg "world"))
2646 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2647 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2648 (message msg arg))
2649
2650+++
2651** Sound support
2652
2653Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2654(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2655
2656Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2657(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2658to enable sound support.
2659
2660Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2661list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2662when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2663functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2664sound to play, before playing the sound.
2665
2666The following sound properties are supported:
2667
2668- `:file FILE'
2669
2670FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2671searched relative to `data-directory'.
2672
6fb40beb
GM
2673- `:data DATA'
2674
2675DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2676may be present, but not both.
2677
a933dad1
DL
2678- `:volume VOLUME'
2679
2680VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
26810..1. This property is optional.
2682
2683Other properties are ignored.
2684
2685** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2686
2687** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2688a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2689
2690** Changes to garbage collection
2691
2692*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2693of live and free strings.
2694
2695*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2696strings that have been consed so far.
2697
a933dad1 2698\f
04545643
GM
2699* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2700Lisp Manual
2701
f7eb32aa 2702+++
a299a6f0
GM
2703** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2704mini-windows.
2705
2706** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2707If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2708considered visible.
2709
a299a6f0 2710** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2711
9a8d84ca
DL
2712+++
2713** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2714
2715** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2716image.
2717
2718- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2719
2720Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2721
2722SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2723measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2724character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2725font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2726FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2727
ebb8f116
GM
2728** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2729has a mask bitmap.
2730
2731- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2732
2733Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2734FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2735or omitted means use the selected frame.
2736
f6499c03 2737+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2738** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2739satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2740
2741+++
2742** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2743optional.
2744
f6499c03
DL
2745+++
2746** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2747below).
04545643
GM
2748
2749\f
a933dad1
DL
2750* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2751
2752Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2753--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2754When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2755so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2756
f6d3257b
GM
2757** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2758to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2759
2760Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2761text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2762is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2763your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2764laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2765just display it black instead.
2766
2767This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2768a line like
2769
2770 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2771
2772in your `.emacs'.
2773
a933dad1
DL
2774** New face implementation.
2775
2776Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2777font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2778
2779+++
2780*** New faces.
2781
2782Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2783
2784 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2785
a933dad1
DL
2786 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2787 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2788
a933dad1 2789 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2790
a933dad1 2791 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2792
a933dad1 2793 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2794
a933dad1 2795 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2796
a933dad1
DL
2797 7. Background color.
2798
2799 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2800
2801 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2802
2803 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2804
2805 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2806
2807 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2808 color.
2809
2810 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2811 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2812
2813Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2814same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2815frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2816faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2817with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2818attributes mentioned above.
2819
2820There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2821definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2822created frames.
79214ddf 2823
a933dad1
DL
2824A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2825have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2826`fully-specified'.
2827
2828+++
2829*** Face merging.
2830
2831The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2832combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2833aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2834properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2835that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2836results in a fully-specified face.
2837
2838+++
2839*** Face realization.
2840
2841After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2842merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2843realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2844available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2845face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2846cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2847
2848Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2849character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2850for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2851charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2852
2853Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2854specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2855being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2856the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2857statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2858
2859In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2860`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
28610x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2862the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2863initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2864Emacs.
2865
2866Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2867`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2868registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2869with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2870
a7c13351 2871+++
a933dad1
DL
2872**** Clearing face caches.
2873
2874The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2875on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2876unused fonts.
2877
2878+++
2879*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2880
a933dad1
DL
2881Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2882given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2883for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2884
2885If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2886pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2887family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2888property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2889an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2890
2891Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2892against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2893match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2894
2895Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2896
2897The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2898attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2899face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2900names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2901that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2902width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2903to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2904
52d89894
GM
2905Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
2906alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
2907doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
2908specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
2909
2910+++
2911**** Scalable fonts
2912
2913Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2914since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2915servers.
2916
2917To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2918`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2919scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2920Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2921scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2922that list. Example:
2923
2924 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2925
2926allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2927
2928+++
2929*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2930
2931- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2932
2933Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2934is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2935string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2936
2937If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2938the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2939FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2940POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2941SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2942These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2943if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2944REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2945the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2946of the face font sort order.
2947
79214ddf 2948- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2949
2950Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2951omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2952(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2953non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2954
2955- Variable: font-list-limit
2956
2957Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2958won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2959matching font. The default is currently 100.
2960
2961+++
2962*** Setting face attributes.
2963
2964For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2965with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2966implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2967`face-attribute'.
2968
2969Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2970symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2971
2972The following attributes are recognized:
2973
2974`:family'
2975
2976VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2977or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2978and `?' are allowed.
2979
2980`:width'
2981
2982VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2983It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2984`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2985`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2986
2987`:height'
2988
787345ff
MB
2989VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2990in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2991scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2992height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2993
2994`:weight'
2995
2996VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2997symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2998`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2999
3000`:slant'
3001
3002VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3003symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3004`reverse-oblique'.
3005
3006`:foreground', `:background'
3007
3008VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3009
3010`:underline'
3011
3012VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3013VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3014a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3015don't underline.
3016
3017`:overline'
3018
3019VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3020VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3021string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3022overline.
3023
3024`:strike-through'
3025
3026VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3027striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3028face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3029is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3030
3031`:box'
3032
3033VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3034around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3035VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3036of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3037and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3038VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3039:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3040the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3041specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3042defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3043the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3044color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3045should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3046like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3047that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3048the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3049box.
3050
3051`:inverse-video'
3052
3053VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3054inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3055
3056`:stipple'
3057
3058If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3059The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3060searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3061HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3062is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3063explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3064
3065For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3066and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3067
3068`:font'
3069
3070Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3071XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3072is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3073versions of Emacs.
3074
3075For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3076be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3077must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3078
3079Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3080`defface'.
3081
787345ff
MB
3082`:inherit'
3083
3084VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3085of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3086like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3087
a933dad1
DL
3088*** Face attributes and X resources
3089
3090The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3091from X resources:
3092
3093 Face attribute X resource class
3094-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3095 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3096 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3097 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3098 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3099 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3100 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3101 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3102 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3103 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3104 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3105 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3106 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3107 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3108 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3109 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3110 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3111 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3112 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3113 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3114
3115+++
3116*** Text property `face'.
3117
3118The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3119specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3120specification can be
3121
31221. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3123
31242. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3125 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3126 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3127 for face attribute names.
3128
31293. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3130 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3131 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3132
3133+++
3134** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3135
acf3ecb7
EZ
3136The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3137on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3138the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3139default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3140`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3141used to clear the mapping table.
3142
acf3ecb7
EZ
3143** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3144
3145The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3146and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3147type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3148color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3149display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3150old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3151`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3152compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3153should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3154modify their color-related behavior.
3155
3156The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3157any frame type.
3158
8a5719f0
EZ
3159** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3160
3161The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3162`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3163`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3164`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3165`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3166`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3167display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3168the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3169platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3170
a933dad1
DL
3171+++
3172** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3173
463cac2d 3174This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3175
3176The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3177end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3178Otherwise, it returns zero.
3179
463cac2d
GM
3180** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3181
3182There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3183buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3184property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3185
9a9dfda8 3186Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3187forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3188to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3189not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3190commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3191boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3192`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3193functions.
463cac2d
GM
3194
3195Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3196a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3197editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3198
9a9dfda8
GM
3199The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3200
59927f88 3201- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3202
3203Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3204
9a9dfda8
GM
3205A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3206If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3207constrained position if that is is different.
3208
3209If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3210positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3211ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3212constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3213as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3214is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3215fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3216the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3217also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3218
3219If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3220NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3221unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3222C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3223only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3224
59927f88
MB
3225If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3226a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3227
3228Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3229
3230- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3231
59927f88 3232Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3233A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3234If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3235
3236- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3237
3238Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3239A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3240If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3241If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3242field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3243
3244- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3245
3246Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3247A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3248If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3249If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3250then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3251
3252- Function: field-string &optional POS
3253
3254Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3255A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3256If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3257
3258- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3259
3260Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3261A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3262If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3263
a933dad1
DL
3264+++
3265** Image support.
3266
3267Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3268strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3269(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3270replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3271
3272If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3273`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3274AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3275window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3276area.
3277
3278IMAGE is an image specification.
3279
3280*** Image specifications
3281
3282Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3283is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3284specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3285symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3286described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3287
3288The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3289
3290`:ascent ASCENT'
3291
576da55d
GM
3292ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3293If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3294to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3295
3296If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3297image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3298
5d94f558 3299If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3300centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3301of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3302overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3303
3304`:margin MARGIN'
3305
79214ddf 3306MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3307margin around the image. Default is 0.
3308
3309`:relief RELIEF'
3310
3311RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3312around an image.
3313
3314`:algorithm ALGO'
3315
47e351a3
GM
3316Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3317
3318ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3319edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3320
3321ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3322apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3323nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3324position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3325around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3326neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3327transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3328x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3329below.
3330
3331 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3332 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3333 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3334
3335The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3336resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3337multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3338of the factors' absolute values.
3339
327652be 3340Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3341
47e351a3
GM
3342 (1 0 0
3343 0 0 0
3344 9 9 -1)
3345
3346Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3347
3348 ( 2 -1 0
3349 -1 0 1
3350 0 1 -2)
3351
ba9eeda1
GM
3352ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3353``disabled''.
3354
47e351a3
GM
3355`:mask MASK'
3356
3357If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3358the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3359image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3360background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3361image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3362the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3363GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3364image.
a933dad1 3365
47e351a3
GM
3366If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3367in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3368`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3369
3370`:file FILE'
3371
3372Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3373search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3374building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3375may be present in the image specification.
3376
518df5c4
GM
3377`:data DATA'
3378
3379Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3380supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3381present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3382support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3383
a933dad1
DL
3384*** Supported image types
3385
b246b1f6 3386**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3387
3388XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3389properties supported are
3390
3391`:foreground FG'
3392
3393FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3394is the frame's foreground.
3395
46c5af7f 3396`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3397
3398BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3399the frame's background color.
3400
3401XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3402case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3403instead of a `:file' property.
3404
3405`:width WIDTH'
3406
3407WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3408
3409`:height HEIGHT'
3410
3411HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3412
3413`:data DATA'
3414
3415DATA must be either
3416
3417 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3418 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3419
3420 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3421
3422 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3423 bitmap.
3424
c76e04a8
GM
3425 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3426 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3427 in the file.
3428
a933dad1
DL
3429**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3430
3431XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3432`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3433found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3434`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3435
3436Additional image properties supported are:
3437
3438`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3439
3440SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3441name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3442name.
3443
3444XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3445add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3446
a933dad1
DL
3447The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3448to display compressed images.
3449
3450**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3451
3452PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3453mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3454mono images are
3455
3456`:foreground FG'
3457
3458FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3459is the frame's foreground.
3460
3461`:background FG'
3462
3463BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3464the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3465
3466**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3467
3468Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3469package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3470are:
3471
a933dad1
DL
3472**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3473
3474Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3475package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3476properties defined.
3477
3478**** GIF, image type `gif'
3479
3480Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3481`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3482
3483Additional image properties supported are:
3484
3485`:index INDEX'
3486
3487INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3488multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3489
3490This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3491For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3492at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3493every 0.1 seconds.
3494
3495(defun show-anim (file max)
3496 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3497 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3498
3499(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3500 (when (= idx max)
3501 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3502 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3503 (save-excursion
3504 (set-buffer buffer)
3505 (goto-char (point-min))
3506 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3507 (insert-image img "x"))
3508 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3509
3510**** PNG, image type `png'
3511
3512Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3513package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3514properties defined.
3515
3516**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3517
3518Additional image properties supported are:
3519
3520`:pt-width WIDTH'
3521
3522WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3523integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3524
3525`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3526
3527HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3528must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3529
3530`:bounding-box BOX'
3531
3532BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3533the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3534files. This is an required property.
3535
3536Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3537lisp/gs.el.
3538
3539*** Lisp interface.
3540
79214ddf
FP
3541The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3542which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3543
3544Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3545they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3546The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3547manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3548images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3549
3550*** Simplified image API, image.el
3551
3552The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3553creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3554can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3555define an image based on available image types. The functions
3556`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3557buffer.
3558
3559+++
3560** Display margins.
3561
3562Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3563and images.
3564
3565To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3566`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3567`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3568obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3569`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3570the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3571of the display margins.
3572
3573You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3574containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3575one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3576string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3577in this file).
3578
3579+++
3580** Help display
3581
3582Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3583moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3584`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3585that have a `help-echo' property.
3586
9662da0b 3587If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3588is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3589the window in which the help was found.
3590
3591If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3592`help-echo' text property was found.
3593
3594If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3595POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3596
3597If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3598the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3599mouse.
d5aa31d8 3600
9662da0b
GM
3601If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3602string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3603
3604For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3605determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3606property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3607For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3608used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3609
3610The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3611the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3612causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3613
3614+++
3615** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3616
3617The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3618This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3619
3620The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3621scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3622The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3623scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3624used.
3625
79214ddf
FP
3626 (global-set-key [A-down]
3627 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3628 (interactive)
79214ddf 3629 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3630 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3631 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3632 #'(lambda ()
3633 (interactive)
79214ddf 3634 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3635 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3636
3637+++
3638** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3639
3640Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3641when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3642variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3643is called with one argument, POS.
3644
3645At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3646characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3647as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3648property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3649`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3650
3651+++
3652** Tool bar support.
3653
3654Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3655parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3656controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3657suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3658`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3659automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3660
3661*** Tool bar item definitions
3662
3663Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3664`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3665where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3666
a933dad1
DL
3667CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3668evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3669the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3670property (see below).
79214ddf 3671
a933dad1
DL
3672BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3673binding are currently ignored.
3674
3675The following properties are recognized:
3676
3677`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3678
a933dad1
DL
3679FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3680or disabled.
79214ddf 3681
a933dad1 3682`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3683
a933dad1 3684FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3685
a933dad1
DL
3686`:filter FUNCTION'
3687
3688FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3689FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3690used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3691
a933dad1
DL
3692`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3693
3694TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3695and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3696
a933dad1
DL
3697`:image IMAGES'
3698
3699IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3700image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3701meaning of each of the four elements:
3702
3703 Index Use when item is
3704 ----------------------------------------
3705 0 enabled and selected
3706 1 enabled and deselected
3707 2 disabled and selected
3708 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3709
4ba7246d
GM
3710If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3711algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3712
a933dad1 3713`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3714
a933dad1
DL
3715Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3716is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3717
dab96841 3718The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3719toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3720to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3721menu bar.
dab96841 3722
8628686a
DL
3723The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3724dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3725buffer-locally to override the global map.
3726
a933dad1
DL
3727*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3728
3729If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3730resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3731than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3732
79214ddf 3733If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3734raised when the mouse moves over them.
3735
3736You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3737`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3738pixels. Default is 1.
3739
3740You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3741`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3742
3743*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3744
3745You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3746a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3747
3748 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3749 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3750 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3751
3752is the original tool bar item definition, then
3753
3754 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3755
3756makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3757item.
3758
3759** Mode line changes.
3760
3761+++
3762*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3763
3764The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3765that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3766a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3767
37681. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3769a `local-map' text property.
3770
37712. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3772that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3773
37743. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3775is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3776`local-map' property.
3777
3778The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3779properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3780example.
3781
54522c9f
GM
3782*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3783evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3784
a933dad1
DL
3785+++
3786*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3787variable mode-line-format to nil.
3788
3789+++
3790*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3791
3792This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3793`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3794completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3795`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3796line.
3797
3798The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3799`header-line'.
3800
3801The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3802position in the header-line.
3803
3804+++
3805** Text property `display'
3806
623a0aae
GM
3807The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3808replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3809also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3810the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3811below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3812
623a0aae
GM
3813*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3814
3815To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3816text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3817
3818If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3819marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3820the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3821is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3822simpler form STRING as property value.
3823
a933dad1
DL
3824*** Variable width and height spaces
3825
3826To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3827specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3828`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3829area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3830marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3831displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3832simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3833
3834The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3835PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3836properties described below.
3837
3838The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3839characters having the `display' property.
3840
3841- :width WIDTH
3842
3843Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3844character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3845
3846- :relative-width FACTOR
3847
3848Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3849first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3850same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3851width of that character by FACTOR.
3852
3853- :align-to HPOS
3854
3855Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3856value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3857
3858Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3859
3860- :height HEIGHT
3861
3862Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3863normal line height.
3864
3865- :relative-height FACTOR
3866
3867The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3868of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3869
3870- :ascent ASCENT
3871
3872Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3873used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3874baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3875equal to 100.
3876
3877You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3878
3879*** Images
3880
3881A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3882. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3883in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3884their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3885the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3886`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3887area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3888the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3889as display specification.
3890
3891*** Other display properties
3892
c9e73000 3893- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
3894
3895Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3896should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3897integer or float.
3898
c9e73000 3899- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
3900
3901Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3902
3903If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3904means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3905the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3906``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3907a font is available counts as a step.
3908
3909If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3910as tall as the frame's default font.
3911
3912If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3913height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3914
3915Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3916`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3917
c9e73000 3918- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
3919
3920FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3921font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3922raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3923amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 3924`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
3925
3926*** Conditional display properties
3927
3928All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3929has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3930applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3931During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3932the text having the `display' property.
3933
3934The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3935`(:when t SPEC)'.
3936
3937+++
3938** New menu separator types.
3939
3940Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3941item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3942treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3943to specify other menu separator types.
3944
3945- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3946
3947No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3948separator occurs.
3949
3950- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3951
3952A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3953
3954- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3955
3956A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3957
3958- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3959
3960A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3961
3962- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3963
3964A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3965
3966- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3967
3968A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3969displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3970
3971- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3972
3973A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3974
3975- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3976
3977A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3978
3979- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3980
3981A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3982
3983- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3984
3985Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3986
3987- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3988
3989Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3990
3991- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3992
3993Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3994
3995- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3996
3997Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3998
3999Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4000the corresponding single-line separators.
4001
4002+++
4003** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4004
4005The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4006`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4007Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4008that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4009default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4010default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4011default foreground is black.
4012
4013The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4014(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4015`ScrollBarBackground').
4016
4017Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4018settings for scroll bar colors.
4019
4020+++
4021** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4022display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4023
4024---
4025** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4026starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4027on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4028line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4029the original window start.
4030
4031---
4032** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4033`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4034now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4035
4036+++
4037** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4038
4039A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4040`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4041windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4042other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4043
4044The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4045fixed-width and fixed-height.
4046
4047 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4048
4049A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4050fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4051window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4052change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4053temporarily to nil, for example
4054
4055 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4056 (enlarge-window 10))
4057
79214ddf 4058Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4059or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4060
4061** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4062terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4063to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4064overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4065horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4066support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4067
3787e12e
GM
4068
4069^L
4070* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4071
4072** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4073input.
4074
4075** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4076
4077** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4078
4079** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4080only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4081exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4082(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4083(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4084
4085** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4086been added.
4087
4088^L
4089* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4090
4091** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4092
4093^L
4094* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4095
4096** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4097M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4098\f
4099* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4100
4101** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4102
4103You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4104Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4105`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4106
4107If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4108is the one that is used.
4109
4110** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4111the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4112Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4113separate from the command's regular output.
4114Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4115says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4116In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4117the buffer name.
4118
4119When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4120output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4121it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4122cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4123
4124** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4125the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4126is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4127created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4128
4129** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4130example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4131match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4132quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4133
4134** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4135now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4136if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4137they never ignore case.
4138
4139** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4140under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4141applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4142of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4143just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4144convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4145part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4146
4147If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4148the same format that was used in the file before.
4149
4150You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4151`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4152
4153** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4154renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4155This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4156
4157** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4158The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4159buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4160your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4161is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4162end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4163Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4164
4165The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4166eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4167control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4168format. You can now customize these variables.
4169
4170** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4171filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4172filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4173enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4174
4175** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4176in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4177windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4178
4179** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4180dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4181doesn't have any effect.
4182
4183** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4184not one per buffer.
4185
4186** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4187use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4188 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4189
4190** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4191To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4192`auto-show-mode' command.
4193
4194** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4195avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4196versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4197choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4198occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4199
4200** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4201cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4202
4203** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4204character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4205feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4206
4207** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4208the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4209interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4210and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4211
4212** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4213
4214The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4215that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4216one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4217codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4218set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4219
4220Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4221from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4222
4223IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4224equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4225a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4226`?' on other systems.
4227
4228IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4229feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4230Unix.
4231
4232Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4233current codepage when it starts.
4234
4235** Mail changes
4236
4237*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4238`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4239appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4240non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4241MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4242headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4243latin-1:
4244
4245 MIME-version: 1.0
4246 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4247 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4248
4249*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4250default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4251default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4252sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4253buffer-file-coding-system.
4254
4255You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4256sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4257mail.
4258
4259*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4260if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4261Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4262list of possible coding systems.
4263
4264** CC Mode changes
4265
4266*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4267modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4268longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4269docstring for details.
4270
4271*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4272symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4273found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4274prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4275lineup functions use this feature currently.
4276
4277*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4278"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4279
4280*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4281"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4282
4283*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4284from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4285symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4286c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4287anonymous classes.
4288
4289*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4290syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4291
4292*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4293inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4294support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4295function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4296
4297*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4298(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4299brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4300c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4301(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4302
4303*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4304
4305*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4306
4307*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4308for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4309
4310*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4311
4312*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4313associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4314This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4315circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4316class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4317
4318** Gnus changes.
4319
4320*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4321added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4322Gnus manual for the full story.
4323
4324*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4325before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4326group, which is created automatically.
4327
4328*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4329values.
4330
4331*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4332
4333*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4334outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4335
4336*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4337`C-u C-c C-c'.
4338
4339*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4340
4341*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4342re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4343
4344*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4345
4346*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4347Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4348
4349*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4350`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4351
4352*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4353control over simplification.
4354
4355*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4356
4357*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4358limit.
4359
4360*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4361
4362*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4363
4364*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4365If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4366rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4367
4368*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4369`a' forces normal posting method.
4370
4371*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4372-- `W d'.
4373
4374*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4375to a non-nil value.
4376
4377*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4378where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4379
4380*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4381has been added.
4382
4383*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4384
4385*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4386
4387*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4388`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4389
4390*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4391`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4392
4393*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4394
4395*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4396been added.
4397
4398*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4399`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4400
4401*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4402updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4403
4404*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4405
4406*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4407
4408*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4409
4410** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4411
4412*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4413options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4414nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4415
4416*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4417TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4418of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4419TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4420can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4421
4422*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4423All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4424but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4425the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4426
4427*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4428the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4429buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4430mismatch.
4431
4432** Changes to RefTeX mode
4433
4434*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4435file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4436
4437*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4438lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4439characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4440removed from the label.
4441
4442*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4443a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4444
4445*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4446customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4447
4448*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4449`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4450expressions.
4451
4452*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4453
4454** New/deleted modes and packages
4455
4456*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4457SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4458
4459*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4460editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4461SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4462
4463*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4464changes with a special face.
4465
4466*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4467this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4468Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4469\f
4470* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4471
4472** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4473This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4474conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4475and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4476check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4477
4478The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4479Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4480distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4481
4482** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4483MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4484controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4485directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4486Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4487on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4488string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4489program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4490printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4491
4492** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4493output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4494available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4495input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4496temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4497program.
4498
4499An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4500and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4501programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4502automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4503as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4504ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4505
4506** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4507a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4508MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4509was not documented clearly before.
4510
4511** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4512This includes Tetris and Snake.
4513\f
4514* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4515
4516** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4517return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4518They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4519meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4520
4521** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4522WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4523and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4524
4525** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4526
4527*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4528It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4529
4530*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4531the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4532integers.
4533
4534** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4535files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4536arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4537file names and attributes are returned.
4538
4539** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4540sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4541accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4542It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4543returns the result.
4544
4545** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4546to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4547
4548** New functions for base64 conversion:
4549
4550The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4551into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4552performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4553optionally.
4554
4555Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4556job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4557
4558**
4559The new function process-running-child-p
4560will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4561terminal to its own child process.
4562
4563** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4564when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4565to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4566itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4567
4568** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4569be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4570
4571** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4572:included is an alias for :visible.
4573
4574easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4575easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4576to move or copy menu entries.
4577
4578** Multibyte editing changes
4579
4580*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4581an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4582make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4583work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4584char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4585 (setq char (sref str idx)
4586 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4587The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4588
4589If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4590(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4591 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4592
4593*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4594region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4595deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4596
4597 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4598
4599This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4600across the boundary.
4601
4602*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4603`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4604 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4605 contains 8-bit characters.
4606 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4607 contains invalid characters.
4608
4609*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4610text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4611preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4612text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4613way.
4614
4615*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4616If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4617end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4618prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4619
4620*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4621compose Thai characters in a string.
4622
4623** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4624argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4625for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4626menus should always use the third argument.
4627
4628** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4629read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4630arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4631input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4632
4633** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4634of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4635programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4636inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4637
4638** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4639the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4640returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4641echo area contents.
4642
4643 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4644
4645** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4646NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4647requested feature cannot be loaded.
4648
4649** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4650foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4651means to clear out that attribute.
4652
4653** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4654gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4655
4656** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4657read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4658unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4659end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4660
4661** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4662the gap of the current buffer.
4663
4664** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4665to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4666current buffer.
4667
4668** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4669facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4670These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4671it back in after any modifications have been made.
4672\f
4673* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4674
4675** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4676the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4677/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4678directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4679subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4680
4681Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4682names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4683Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4684which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4685these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4686
4687Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4688starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4689time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4690
4691This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4692Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4693to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4694subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4695`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4696results.
4697
4698** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4699GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4700that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4701fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4702\f
4703* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4704
4705** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4706including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4707it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4708perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4709
4710** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4711specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4712region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4713further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4714command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4715within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4716are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4717region.
4718
4719In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4720selective undo.
4721
4722** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4723unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4724buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4725effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4726Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4727
4728The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4729though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4730-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4731load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4732
4733** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4734no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4735enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4736something that most users not do.
4737
4738** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4739operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4740The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4741applications.
4742
4743C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4744pasting operations.
4745
4746** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4747setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4748like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4749printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4750`ps-printer-name'.
4751
4752** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4753minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4754any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4755except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4756incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4757hits a new word.
4758
4759Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4760Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4761to be confused by TeX commands.
4762
4763You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4764correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4765clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4766of various alternative replacements and actions.
4767
4768Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4769the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4770corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4771alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4772flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4773
4774Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4775flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4776
4777** Changes in input method usage.
4778
4779Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4780the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4781respectively.
4782
4783You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4784
4785If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4786of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4787
4788The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4789that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4790
4791 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4792
4793 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4794
4795 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4796 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4797
4798 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4799 given in the following case:
4800 o When you are using a complex input method.
4801 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4802
4803If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4804input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4805and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4806setting it to t is helpful.
4807
4808The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4809
4810In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4811keys:
4812 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4813 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4814 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4815These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4816environment.
4817
4818** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4819names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4820minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4821get
4822
4823 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4824
4825which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4826
4827Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4828Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4829
4830** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4831at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4832its owner and group.
4833
4834** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4835Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4836
4837** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4838contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4839
4840** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4841which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4842in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4843by the left edge of the rectangle.
4844
4845** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4846increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4847C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4848for writing keyboard macros.
4849
4850** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4851files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4852frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4853the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4854additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4855info.
4856
4857** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4858
4859** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4860query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4861contents only.
4862
4863** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4864confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4865the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4866says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4867
4868** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4869non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4870literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4871
4872** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4873now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4874Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4875inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4876
4877** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4878failure if the command produces no output.
4879
4880** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4881manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4882the mouse.
4883
4884** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4885mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4886function and variable names.
4887
4888** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4889reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4890file-coding-system-alist.
4891
4892** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4893t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4894converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4895the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4896according to the current fontset.
4897
4898** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4899
4900The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4901that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4902nonascii-insert-offset.
4903
4904For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4905enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4906nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4907characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4908
4909** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4910an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4911
4912** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4913letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4914
4915** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4916are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4917command keys.
4918
4919** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4920user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4921
4922Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4923user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4924all variables that have documentation.
4925
4926** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4927shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4928that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4929minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4930it should show; the default is 20.
4931
4932Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4933the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4934of your input.
4935
4936** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4937all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4938recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4939argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4940the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4941Newly added options are included as well.
4942
4943If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4944then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4945for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4946
4947This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4948Customize menu.
4949
4950** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4951the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4952
4953** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4954buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4955invoked.
4956
4957** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4958that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4959The default is 1.
4960
4961** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4962syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4963new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4964(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4965sensibly.
4966
4967** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4968
4969** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4970value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4971two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4972
4973** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4974reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4975for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4976every night.
4977
4978** Desktop changes
4979
4980*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4981the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4982
4983*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4984and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4985
4986** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4987read and post multi-lingual articles.
4988
4989** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4990doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4991be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4992outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4993the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4994made invisible again.
4995
4996** Mail reading and sending changes
4997
4998*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4999the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5000changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5001toggle.
5002
5003*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5004now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5005summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5006the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5007rmail-default-body-file.
5008
5009*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5010longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5011handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5012
5013*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5014it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5015is evaluated to insert the signature.
5016
5017*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5018outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5019handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5020putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5021transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5022especially interested in trying feedmail.
5023
5024feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5025feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5026provided by feedmail are:
5027
5028**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5029stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5030there is also a queue for draft messages
5031
5032**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5033be prompted for confirmation
5034
5035**** does smart filling of address headers
5036
5037**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5038the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5039can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5040
5041**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5042the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5043/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5044function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5045
5046** Dired changes
5047
5048*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5049files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5050
5051*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5052run Dired on the directory name at point.
5053
5054*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5055files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5056for a specified regexp.
5057
5058** VC Changes
5059
5060*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5061conveniently.
5062
5063*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5064faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5065Dired.
5066
5067VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5068directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5069listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5070currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5071
5072You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5073then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5074vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5075control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5076on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5077
5078All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5079is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5080`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5081the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5082`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5083
5084The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5085toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5086VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5087`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5088
5089Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5090ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5091command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5092
5093*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5094file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5095session to resolve them.
5096
5097Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5098resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5099contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5100uses as well).
5101
5102*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5103command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5104you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5105either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5106branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5107If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5108using ediff.
5109
5110** Changes in Font Lock
5111
5112*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5113are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5114use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5115unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5116compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5117
5118** Frame name display changes
5119
5120*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5121frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5122raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5123when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5124
5125*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5126frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5127menu.
5128
5129** Comint (subshell) changes
5130
5131*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5132subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5133with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5134
5135*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5136
5137C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5138that is, the line after the last line you got.
5139You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5140
5141C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5142send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5143the following line.
5144
5145C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5146which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5147previously sent input.
5148
5149C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5150it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5151as the search string.
5152
5153*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5154automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5155
5156** C mode changes
5157
5158*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5159and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5160assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5161definition.
5162
5163*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5164(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5165Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5166style is still the default however.
5167
5168*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5169
5170*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5171are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5172them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5173
5174*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5175and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5176
5177*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5178namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5179
5180*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5181makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5182
5183*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5184c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5185
5186*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5187should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5188package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5189variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5190
5191** Changes to hippie-expand.
5192
5193*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5194non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5195which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5196
5197*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5198non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5199expanding dynamically.
5200
5201*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5202non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5203
5204*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5205non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5206this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5207expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5208
5209*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5210
5211** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5212
5213*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5214bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5215automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5216bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5217against the first word in the title.
5218
5219*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5220capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5221bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5222lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5223lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5224bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5225
5226*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5227generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5228replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5229bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5230
5231** Changes in vcursor.el.
5232
5233*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5234and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5235variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5236entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5237`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5238in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5239
5240*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5241Editing group once the package is loaded.
5242
5243*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5244generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5245vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5246
5247*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5248vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5249
5250** Ispell changes.
5251
5252*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5253buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5254are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5255
5256*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5257A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5258and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5259defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5260include:
5261
5262 o URLs are automatically skipped
5263 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5264
5265*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5266
5267** Changes to RefTeX mode
5268
5269RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5270large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5271re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5272section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5273
5274*** New recursive parser.
5275
5276The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5277entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5278recursive parser scans the individual files.
5279
5280*** Parsing only part of a document.
5281
5282Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5283partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5284the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5285
5286 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5287
5288*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5289
5290This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5291
5292 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5293
5294*** Using multiple selection buffers
5295
5296If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5297for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5298
5299 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5300
5301*** References to external documents.
5302
5303The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5304documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5305documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5306macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5307RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5308the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5309The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5310
5311*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5312
5313The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5314and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5315
5316Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5317the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5318
5319*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5320
5321The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5322buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5323
5324*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5325
5326The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5327contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5328`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5329have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5330enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5331at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5332more.
5333
5334*** Support for the varioref package
5335
5336The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5337
5338*** New hooks
5339
5340Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5341and citations are created. These hooks are
5342`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5343`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5344
5345*** Citations outside LaTeX
5346
5347The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5348a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5349
5350*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5351
5352The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5353fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5354fontified, use
5355
5356 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5357
5358** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5359With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5360the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5361directories that contain the same file name.
5362
5363Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5364Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5365file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5366Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5367have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5368names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5369directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5370directory.
5371
5372** New modes and packages
5373
5374*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5375It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5376it, but some do not.
5377
5378*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5379code.
5380
5381*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5382current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5383around in a buffer.
5384
5385Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5386
5387*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5388uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5389be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5390established system of notation similar to Chess.
5391
5392*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5393documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5394guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5395
5396*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5397available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5398system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5399simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5400functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5401the like.
5402
5403*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5404identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5405
5406*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5407within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5408used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5409the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5410
5411*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5412
5413 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5414 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5415 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5416 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5417 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5418 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5419 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5420 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5421 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5422 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5423 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5424
5425 Platform-specific modes:
5426
5427 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5428 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5429 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5430 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5431 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5432 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5433 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5434 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5435 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5436\f
5437* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5438
5439** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5440use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5441That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5442Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5443
5444Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5445you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5446consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5447
5448** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5449and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5450specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5451searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5452
5453** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5454multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5455character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5456environment.
5457
5458** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5459take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5460string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5461current input method for reading this one event.
5462
5463** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5464now control whether to output certain characters as
5465backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5466non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5467characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5468in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5469\f
5470* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5471
5472** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5473of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5474
5475** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5476in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5477always increases point by 1.
5478
5479The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5480considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5481
5482See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5483
5484** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5485Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5486default value changed. For example,
5487
5488 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5489 :type 'integer
5490 :group 'foo
5491 :version "20.3")
5492
5493 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5494 :version "20.3")
5495
5496If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5497default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5498is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5499`:version' in the top level group.
5500
5501This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5502
5503** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5504starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5505
5506However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5507symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5508support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5509to themselves.
5510
5511If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5512this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5513values whatever.
5514
5515** There is a new debugger command, R.
5516It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5517in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5518
5519** Frame-local variables.
5520
5521You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5522the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5523local bindings for that variable.
5524
5525These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5526frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5527modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5528parameter name.
5529
5530Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5531Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5532active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5533that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5534
5535It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5536clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5537very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5538through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5539
5540** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5541"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5542evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5543makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5544See the documentation in sregex.el.
5545
5546** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5547is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5548parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5549The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5550
5551** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5552If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5553
5554** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5555known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5556define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5557
5558** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5559when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5560it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5561history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5562
5563The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5564return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5565empty input.
5566
5567** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5568for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5569`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5570Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5571`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5572
5573** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5574echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5575a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5576default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5577
5578** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5579specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5580function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5581place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5582non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5583
5584** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5585If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5586up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5587end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5588
5589** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5590which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5591If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5592
5593** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5594holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5595was directed to display this buffer.
5596
5597** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5598with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5599describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5600other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5601set-window-configuration.
5602
5603** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5604window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5605positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5606windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5607
5608** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5609override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5610look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5611
5612If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5613non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5614map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5615
5616minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5617and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5618
5619** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5620except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5621
5622** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5623USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5624floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5625
5626** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5627to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5628in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5629it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5630
5631** Menu changes
5632
5633*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5634keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5635better supported.
5636
5637The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5638a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5639you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5640can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5641then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5642
5643*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5644
5645In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5646 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5647defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5648starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5649
5650The format is:
5651 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5652 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5653where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5654string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5655The supported properties include
5656
5657:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5658 item is enabled.
5659:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5660 item should appear in the menu.
5661:filter FILTER-FN
5662 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5663 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5664 It should return a binding to use instead.
5665:keys DESCRIPTION
5666 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5667 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5668 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5669:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5670 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5671 keyboard binding.
5672:key-sequence nil
5673 This means that the command normally has no
5674 keyboard equivalent.
5675:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5676:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5677 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5678 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5679 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5680
5681Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5682Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5683
5684(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5685
5686** New event types
5687
5688*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5689mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5690corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5691which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5692
5693 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5694
5695where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5696same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5697indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5698negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5699the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5700forward, away from the user.
5701
5702As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5703
5704*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5705files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5706and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5707filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5708loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5709
5710 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5711
5712where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5713same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5714that were dragged and dropped.
5715
5716As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5717
5718** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5719
5720*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5721any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5722to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5723
5724*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5725can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5726that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5727
5728*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5729in Emacs 19 and before.
5730
5731The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5732The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5733
5734*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5735buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5736unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5737representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5738
5739This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5740as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5741viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5742one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5743will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5744
5745This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5746representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5747(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5748consistent with the new representation.
5749
5750*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5751representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5752about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5753however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5754
5755The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5756nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5757using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5758
5759*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5760representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5761representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5762
5763The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5764loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5765is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5766
5767*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5768which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5769
5770*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5771which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5772
5773*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5774portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5775so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5776You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5777
5778*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5779it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5780
5781*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5782convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5783buffer or string being searched.
5784
5785One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5786[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5787searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5788searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5789obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5790you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5791expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5792
5793*** Structure of coding system changed.
5794
5795All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5796by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5797which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5798as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5799vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5800your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5801define-coding-system-alias.
5802
5803The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5804the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5805access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5806pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5807character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5808safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5809'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5810`iso-8859-1'.
5811
5812Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5813The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5814coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5815(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5816
5817Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5818also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5819are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5820the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5821
5822*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5823proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5824This function requires a user interaction.
5825
5826*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5827find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5828select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5829systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5830a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5831select-safe-coding-system.
5832
5833*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5834decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5835last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5836was done.
5837
5838*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5839used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5840coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5841
5842*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5843return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5844characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5845`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5846
5847*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5848coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5849coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5850converted.
5851
5852*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5853coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5854
5855*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5856character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5857character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5858each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5859either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5860range of characters.
5861
5862*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5863Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5864
5865*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5866in the current buffer at position POS.
5867
5868*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5869input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5870function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5871character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5872event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5873binding input-method-function to nil.
5874
5875The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5876method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5877input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5878the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5879not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5880
5881The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5882subsequent events of a key sequence.
5883
5884*** You can customize any language environment by using
5885set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5886
5887The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5888customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5889instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5890environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5891exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5892\f
5893* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5894
5895** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5896options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5897at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5898tree structure.
5899
5900M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5901user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5902
5903With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5904session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5905in your .emacs file.)
5906
5907** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5908You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5909
5910** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5911This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5912
5913** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5914immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5915kills the region.
5916
5917The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5918delete the character before point, as usual.
5919
5920** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5921on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5922by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5923
5924** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5925insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5926the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5927onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5928history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5929past.)
5930
5931** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5932This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5933in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5934TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5935makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5936
5937As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5938and is an alias for it.
5939
5940If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5941use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5942
5943** Scrolling changes
5944
5945*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5946position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5947
5948In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5949on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5950where it started.
5951
5952*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5953move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5954screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5955does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5956
5957*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5958top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5959comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5960recenters the window.
5961
5962** International character set support (MULE)
5963
5964Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5965including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5966Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5967Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5968features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5969MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5970
5971Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5972coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5973character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5974variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5975into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5976
5977Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5978generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5979supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5980language, to make it possible to type them.
5981
5982The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5983character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5984
5985The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5986to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5987
5988You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5989
5990 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5991
5992Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5993characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5994argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5995already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5996characters for their work until they want to change.
5997
5998*** Input methods
5999
6000An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6001specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6002has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6003the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6004support several input methods.
6005
6006The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6007another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6008work.
6009
6010A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6011characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6012composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6013consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6014sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6015letter.
6016
6017The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6018by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6019First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6020marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6021mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6022
6023None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6024they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6025phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6026converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6027
6028Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6029word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6030typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6031the first guess is wrong.
6032
6033*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6034turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6035
6036If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6037byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6038they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6039the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6040
6041However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6042use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6043includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6044translate automatically to and from either one.
6045
6046*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6047
6048Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6049file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6050sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6051what you want.
6052
6053If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6054example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6055system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6056multibyte characters in that buffer.
6057
6058If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6059character conversion as well.
6060
6061*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6062
6063A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6064Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6065requires using many fonts.
6066
6067Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6068collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6069
6070A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6071the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6072have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6073you would use a font.
6074
6075If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6076specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6077display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6078
6079The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6080(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6081characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6082or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6083and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6084
6085*** Defining fontsets.
6086
6087Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6088chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6089with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6090
6091Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6092of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6093`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6094standard fontset are created automatically.
6095
6096If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6097argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6098FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6099with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6100name is `fontset-startup'.
6101
6102Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6103The resource value should have this form:
6104 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6105FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6106 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6107 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6108 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6109The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6110of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6111CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6112FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6113
6114Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6115last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6116You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6117
6118For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6119font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6120following resource,
6121 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6122the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6123 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6124Here is the substitution rule:
6125 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6126 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6127 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6128 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6129 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6130
6131The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6132fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6133that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6134
6135With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6136like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6137name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6138fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6139fontsets.
6140
6141*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6142defaults for a particular choice of language.
6143
6144Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6145method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6146visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6147already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6148language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6149system for new files that you create.
6150
6151It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6152set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6153whole Emacs session.
6154
6155For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6156chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6157with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6158
6159*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6160specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6161specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6162the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6163coding systems that Emacs supports.
6164
6165*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6166lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6167This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6168After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6169is used for *the immediately following command*.
6170
6171So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6172write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6173
6174If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6175then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6176
6177For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6178visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6179
6180*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6181construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6182to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6183specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6184of the file.
6185
6186*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6187the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6188code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6189translated into that character code.
6190
6191This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6192various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6193
6194By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6195
6196*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6197the coding system for keyboard input.
6198
6199Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6200with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6201some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6202
6203By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6204
6205Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6206input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6207translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6208to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6209designed to work with terminals.
6210
6211*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6212specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6213This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6214has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6215translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6216in the corresponding buffer.
6217
6218By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6219
6220*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6221to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6222It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6223
6224*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6225an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6226command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6227want to use.
6228
6229C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6230method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6231
6232*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6233layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6234remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6235which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6236
6237*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6238the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6239related information.
6240
6241*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6242HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6243scripts.
6244
6245*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6246information about the support for a particular language.
6247You specify the language as an argument.
6248
6249*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6250the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6251first dash.
6252
6253A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6254(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6255whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
62561 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6257
6258 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6259 B big5 (Chinese)
6260 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6261 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6262 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6263 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6264 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6265 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6266 K euc-korea (Korean)
6267 R koi8 (Russian)
6268 Q tibetan
6269 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6270 T lao
6271 T tis620 (Thai)
6272 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6273 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6274 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6275 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6276 z hz (Chinese)
6277
6278When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6279two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6280coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6281keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6282
6283*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6284conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6285
6286When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6287into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6288rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6289Rmail files themselves.
6290
6291*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6292conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6293
6294Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6295for sending mail:
6296
6297- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6298- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6299- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6300 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6301- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6302
6303*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6304to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6305Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6306translations.
6307
6308** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6309of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6310insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6311without any conversion.
6312
6313** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6314You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6315RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6316any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6317
6318** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6319functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6320
6321Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6322Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6323
6324Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6325mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6326
6327** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6328complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6329in the buffer before point.
6330
6331With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6332symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6333you are using.
6334
6335With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6336just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6337
6338** File locking works with NFS now.
6339
6340The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6341in the same directory as FILENAME.
6342
6343This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6344works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6345can become a bottleneck.
6346
6347The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6348does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6349create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6350file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6351rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6352so useful that the change is worth while.
6353
6354When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6355are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6356collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6357tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6358
6359** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6360it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6361show-paren-mode.
6362
6363** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6364selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6365delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6366
6367** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6368within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6369complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6370
6371** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6372it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6373set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6374
6375** Changes in View mode.
6376
6377*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6378Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6379
6380*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6381view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6382
6383*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6384previous state.
6385
6386*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6387scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6388
6389*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6390non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6391not just the selected window.
6392
6393*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6394read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6395turns View mode on or off.
6396
6397*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6398how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6399delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6400
6401** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6402now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6403
6404** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6405has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6406presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6407which version to compare with.
6408
6409** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6410blocks if a match is inside the block.
6411
6412The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6413is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6414isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6415shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6416
6417By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6418of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6419blocks, all of them or none.
6420
6421** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6422current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6423confirmation first.
6424
6425** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6426now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6427However, the mode will not be changed if
6428(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6429(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6430 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6431(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6432
6433This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6434
6435However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6436these commands do not change the major mode.
6437
6438** M-x occur changes.
6439
6440*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6441it performs a case-sensitive search.
6442
6443*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6444if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6445using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6446
6447** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6448in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6449window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6450that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6451buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6452
6453** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6454after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6455appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6456come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6457
6458** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6459selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6460buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6461
6462** Outline mode changes.
6463
6464*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6465
6466*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6467
6468** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6469you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6470Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6471was already active.
6472
6473The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6474unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6475get confused by it.
6476
6477If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6478set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6479
6480** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6481
6482*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6483conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6484character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6485including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6486
6487The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6488mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6489copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6490
6491*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6492are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6493values.
6494
6495`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6496case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6497`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6498case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6499
6500** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6501certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6502can be. The default value is 30.
6503
6504** Changes in Mail mode.
6505
6506*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6507Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6508composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6509`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6510`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6511behavior.
6512
6513C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6514compose-mail-other-frame.
6515
6516*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6517the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6518replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6519buffer that shows the original message.
6520
6521*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6522with separator lines around the contents.
6523
6524*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6525in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6526definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6527need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6528
6529*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6530
6531**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6532for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6533controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6534Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6535
6536**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6537to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6538/etc/passwd.
6539
6540**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6541to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6542/etc/passwd.
6543
6544** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6545special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6546directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6547reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6548
6549Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6550when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6551be taken to be magic.
6552
6553** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6554files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6555available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6556
6557M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6558(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6559
6560** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6561suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6562
6563In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6564
6565new key dired.el binding old key
6566------- ---------------- -------
6567 * c dired-change-marks c
6568 * m dired-mark m
6569 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6570 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6571 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6572 * u dired-unmark u
6573 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6574 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6575 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6576 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6577 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6578 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6579
6580** Rmail changes.
6581
6582*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6583saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6584chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6585each time you run it.
6586
6587*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6588whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6589
6590*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6591messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6592means to move in the opposite direction.
6593
6594*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6595you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6596
6597*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6598just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6599It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6600can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6601for output.
6602
6603** Gnus changes.
6604
6605*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6606
6607*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6608Gnus.
6609
6610*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6611`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6612
6613*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6614article mode line.
6615
6616*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6617
6618*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6619
6620(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6621
6622*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6623are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6624`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6625
6626*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6627
6628*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6629
6630*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6631See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6632
6633*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6634Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6635used to pick articles.
6636
6637*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6638another have been added.
6639
6640 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6641
6642*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6643generating lines in buffers.
6644
6645*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6646`M-C-_'.
6647
6648*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6649
6650*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6651
6652 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6653
6654*** Scores can be decayed.
6655
6656 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6657
6658*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6659Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6660
6661*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6662the native server.
6663
6664 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6665
6666*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6667(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6668
6669*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6670
6671*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6672even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6673
6674*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6675(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6676
6677 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6678 a group.
6679
6680*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6681sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6682
6683 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6684
6685*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6686
6687 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6688
6689*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6690
6691 Use the `Y c' command.
6692
6693*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6694
6695*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6696
6697 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6698
6699*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6700from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6701
6702 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6703
6704*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6705
6706*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6707the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6708
6709 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6710
6711Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6712and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6713from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6714hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6715this issue.)
6716
6717Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6718automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6719particular news group. This can be done by:
6720
6721 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6722
6723Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6724of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6725"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6726system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6727for reading and posting).
6728
6729CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6730 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6731Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6732newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6733there.
6734
6735Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6736default. Here are some of these default settings:
6737
6738 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6739 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6740 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6741 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6742 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6743
6744When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6745the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6746
6747** CC mode changes.
6748
6749*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6750code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6751values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6752this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6753Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6754loaded.
6755
6756If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6757Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6758style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6759share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6760c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6761must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6762
6763*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6764of the current buffer.
6765
6766*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6767it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6768of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6769
6770*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6771style that the Python developers like.
6772
6773*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6774This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6775just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6776
6777** VC Changes [new]
6778
6779** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6780name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6781directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6782
6783This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6784master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6785developers.
6786
6787You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6788RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6789
6790*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6791other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6792writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6793calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6794
6795*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6796version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6797
6798** Calendar changes.
6799
6800A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6801of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6802for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6803
6804** ps-print changes
6805
6806There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6807
6808*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6809
6810The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6811formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6812`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6813`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6814It defaults to `letter'.
6815If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6816
6817The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6818of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6819non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6820
6821The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6822It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6823It defaults to 1.
6824
6825*** Horizontal layout
6826
6827The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6828`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6829All are measured in points.
6830
6831*** Vertical layout
6832
6833The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6834`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6835All are measured in points.
6836
6837*** Headers
6838
6839If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6840`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6841margin above the text.
6842
6843If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6844framing box is printed around the header.
6845
6846The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6847`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6848
6849The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6850`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6851`ps-header-font-size'.
6852
6853*** Font managing
6854
6855The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6856used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6857`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6858elements to this alist.
6859
6860The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6861for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6862
6863** hideshow changes.
6864
6865*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6866C++, ; for lisp).
6867
6868*** Support for java-mode added.
6869
6870*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6871in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6872
6873*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6874the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6875way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6876
6877*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6878robust and a lot faster.
6879
6880*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6881
6882*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6883to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6884documentation for more details.
6885
6886** Changes in Enriched mode.
6887
6888*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6889filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6890of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6891use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6892the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6893
6894*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6895distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6896as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6897as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6898
6899** Font Lock mode
6900
6901*** Custom support
6902
6903The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6904font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6905faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6906group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6907your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6908consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6909
6910You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6911
6912*** Maximum decoration
6913
6914Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6915default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6916of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6917supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6918to get the old behavior.
6919
6920*** New support
6921
6922Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6923
6924Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6925support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6926
6927*** Configurable support
6928
6929Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6930additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6931c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6932java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6933list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6934of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6935convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6936
6937Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6938way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6939it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6940
6941*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6942
6943You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6944highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6945for any mode.
6946
6947For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6948
6949 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6950
6951in your ~/.emacs.
6952
6953*** New faces
6954
6955Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6956font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6957distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6958to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6959
6960*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6961
6962The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6963cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6964same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6965
6966*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6967
6968The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6969according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6970the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6971non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6972refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6973the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6974Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6975
6976This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6977For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6978this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6979refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6980containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6981the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6982
6983As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6984
6985Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6986Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6987Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6988new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6989
6990If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6991settings.
6992
6993** Ada mode changes.
6994
6995*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6996If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6997procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6998you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6999stubs.
7000
7001*** There are two new commands:
7002 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7003 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7004
7005The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7006`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7007`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7008
7009*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7010is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7011Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7012
7013*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7014formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7015places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7016space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7017
7018** Scheme mode changes.
7019
7020*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7021mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7022for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7023with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7024have any effect.
7025
7026If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7027still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7028scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7029variables as buffer-local variables.
7030
7031*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7032Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7033
7034** Changes to the emacsclient program
7035
7036*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7037USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7038associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7039can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7040
7041*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7042it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7043buffer in Emacs.
7044
7045*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7046use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7047ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7048option takes precedence.
7049
7050** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7051constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7052(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7053
7054** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7055which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7056the current defun.
7057
7058** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7059following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7060
7061** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7062and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7063necessary).
7064
7065** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7066if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7067these register values no longer become completely useless.
7068If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7069asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7070it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7071
7072** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7073example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7074be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7075you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7076
7077You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7078variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7079file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7080revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7081only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7082
7083** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7084since it applies only to the current frame.
7085
7086** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7087file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7088and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7089
7090This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7091multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7092variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7093tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7094instead of just the file you are editing.
7095
7096** RefTeX mode
7097
7098RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7099and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7100different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7101multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7102turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7103
7104C-c ( reftex-label
7105 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7106 knows which kind of label is needed.
7107
7108C-c ) reftex-reference
7109 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7110 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7111
7112C-c [ reftex-citation
7113 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7114 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7115
7116C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7117 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7118
7119C-c = reftex-toc
7120 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7121 can quickly jump to every section.
7122
7123Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7124commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7125Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7126reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7127C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7128
7129** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7130
7131*** Info documentation is now available.
7132
7133*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7134both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7135
7136*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7137bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7138
7139*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7140(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7141
7142*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7143entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7144appropriate functions.
7145
7146*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7147entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7148
7149*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7150been cleaned.
7151
7152*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7153bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7154
7155*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7156shall be delimited.
7157
7158*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7159bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7160bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7161
7162*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7163field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7164prefixed with `ALT'.
7165
7166*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7167bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7168formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7169documentation).
7170
7171*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7172documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7173for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7174
7175*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7176comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7177
7178*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7179alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7180signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7181
7182*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7183
7184*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7185
7186*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7187from alien sources.
7188
7189*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7190to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7191crossref entries.
7192
7193*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7194region.
7195
7196*** Added support for imenu.
7197
7198*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7199of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7200`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7201`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7202
7203*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7204from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7205
7206** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7207
7208** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7209
7210** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7211functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7212Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7213as an argument.
7214
7215When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7216and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7217
7218** browse-url changes
7219
7220*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7221Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7222(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7223non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7224customization variables.
7225
7226*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7227
7228*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7229lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7230(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7231
7232** Changes in Ediff
7233
7234*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7235pops up the Info file for this command.
7236
7237*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7238the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7239merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7240directories).
7241
7242*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7243and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7244files in the same directory.
7245
7246*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7247The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7248related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7249
7250** Changes in Viper
7251
7252*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7253*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7254 instead of vip-.
7255*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7256*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7257Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7258*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7259*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7260*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7261color when Viper is in insert state.
7262*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7263Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7264viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7265
7266** Etags changes.
7267
7268*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7269default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7270Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7271variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7272not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7273
7274*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7275
7276*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7277constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7278
7279*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7280recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7281In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7282
7283*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7284C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7285recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7286methods and protocols.
7287
7288*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7289.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7290column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7291paragraph name.
7292
7293*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7294an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7295at least M times and as many as N times.
7296
7297** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7298in files has changed slightly.
7299
7300With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7301time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7302This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7303with old time-stamp-format values.
7304
7305In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7306(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7307This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7308reasons.
7309
7310In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7311natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7312fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7313(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7314time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7315specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7316
7317Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7318case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7319truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7320
7321The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7322being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7323future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7324recommended now will continue to work then.
7325
7326See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7327details.
7328
7329** There are some additional major modes:
7330
7331dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7332m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7333meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7334
7335** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7336copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7337into Emacs.
7338
7339** New Lisp packages include:
7340
7341*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7342
7343*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7344be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7345
7346*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7347
7348*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7349in shell buffers.
7350
7351*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7352See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7353and `elint-defun'.
7354
7355*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7356meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7357ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7358strings or comments.
7359
7360These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7361abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7362you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7363insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7364at these points.
7365
7366*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7367can visit them by short forms of their names.
7368
7369*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7370Emacs Lisp function at point.
7371
7372*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7373
7374*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7375switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7376
7377*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7378
7379*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7380
7381*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7382
7383*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7384from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7385
7386*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7387You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7388inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7389original place after inserting the copy.
7390
7391*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7392on the buffer.
7393
7394You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7395velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7396(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7397
7398Enable mouse-drag with:
7399 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7400-or-
7401 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7402
7403*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7404mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7405
7406*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7407It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7408
7409*** ogonek
7410
7411The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7412Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7413platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7414TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7415ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7416prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7417instance) and vice versa.
7418
7419To use this package load it using
7420 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7421Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7422 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7423 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7424The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7425ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7426
7427*** Interface to ph.
7428
7429Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7430
7431The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7432services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7433these servers.
7434
7435*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7436
7437*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7438You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7439while the real cursor does not move.
7440
7441*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7442for visiting your favorite web sites.
7443
7444*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7445so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7446
7447** movemail change
7448
7449Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7450mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7451supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7452user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7453
7454This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7455\f
7456* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7457
7458** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7459
7460Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7461end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7462Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7463file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7464file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7465
7466To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7467C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7468coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7469specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7470LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7471save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7472\f
7473* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7474
7475** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7476Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7477vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7478Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7479
7480** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7481to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7482
7483In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7484don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7485"win".
7486
7487** Basic Lisp changes
7488
7489*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7490evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7491
7492*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7493be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7494or by the user.
7495
7496The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7497
7498*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7499
7500(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7501(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7502
7503*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7504usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7505its argument.
7506
7507*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7508
7509*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7510
7511*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7512
7513*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7514error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7515include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7516`format' function.
7517
7518*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7519or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7520whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7521
7522*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7523either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7524adding one of these suffixes.
7525
7526*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7527which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7528If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7529
7530We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7531because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7532
7533*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7534
7535*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7536You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7537
7538*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7539conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7540
7541 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7542
7543BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7544BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7545
7546*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7547choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7548restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7549works using `save-current-buffer'.
7550
7551*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7552write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7553of the last form.
7554
7555*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7556which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7557last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7558as the last form.
7559
7560*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7561characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7562matches.
7563
7564For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7565
7566*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7567with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7568Then it returns that string.
7569
7570For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7571
7572(with-output-to-string
7573 (princ "The buffer is ")
7574 (princ (buffer-name)))
7575
7576returns "The buffer is foo".
7577
7578** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7579is non-nil.
7580
7581These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7582buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7583characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7584
7585*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7586a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7587
7588Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7589character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7590Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7591position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7592characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7593 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7594
7595ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7596Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7597non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7598characters".
7599
7600The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7601through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7602"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7603range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7604leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7605
7606*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7607(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7608multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7609character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7610
7611This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7612always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7613
7614However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7615
7616*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7617because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7618have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7619the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7620guaranteed.
7621
7622*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7623between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7624character).
7625
7626When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7627
7628 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7629 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7630 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7631 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7632 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7633
7634*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7635
7636*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7637`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7638more than the number of characters.
7639
7640You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7641it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7642\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7643is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7644follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7645newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7646
7647*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7648and returns a string containing those characters.
7649
7650*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7651(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7652counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7653character, sref signals an error.
7654
7655*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7656in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7657string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7658
7659*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7660in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7661region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7662
7663*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7664the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7665to a vector of the characters in it.
7666
7667*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7668of a string. You call it as follows:
7669
7670 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7671
7672This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7673STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7674This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7675Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7676it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7677
7678*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7679if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7680
7681*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7682if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7683
7684*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7685to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7686not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7687which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7688
7689(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7690
7691This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7692
7693The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7694If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7695are not included in the resulting value.
7696
7697The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7698at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7699WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7700is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7701
7702If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7703place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7704character extends across that column), then the padding character
7705PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7706string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7707column START-COLUMN.
7708
7709*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7710the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7711necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7712difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7713changed text, before the change.
7714
7715*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7716sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7717one character set for each script, not for each language.
7718
7719**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7720
7721**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7722
7723**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7724set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7725
7726**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7727name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7728which identify the character within that character set.
7729
7730**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7731byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7732opposite of split-char.
7733
7734**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7735of all the characters between BEG and END.
7736
7737**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7738of all the characters in a string.
7739
7740*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7741and specifying coding systems.
7742
7743**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7744system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7745of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7746(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7747and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7748as what to do about code conversion.)
7749
7750**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7751name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7752
7753**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7754for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7755except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7756
7757Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7758which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7759to match against a file name.
7760
7761VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7762a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7763decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7764to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7765systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7766specifies the coding system for encoding.
7767
7768If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7769or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7770
7771**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7772the coding system to use for network sockets.
7773
7774Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7775which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7776either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7777service names.
7778
7779VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7780a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7781decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7782to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7783systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7784specifies the coding system for encoding.
7785
7786If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7787or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7788
7789**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7790for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7791except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7792start the subprocess.
7793
7794**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7795systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7796when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7797(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7798to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7799
7800**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7801coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7802subprocess.
7803
7804It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7805but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7806start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7807connection permanently or until overridden.
7808
7809The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7810file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7811network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7812coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7813It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7814system for one operation at a time.
7815
7816**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7817files, subprocesses or network connections.
7818
7819**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7820coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7821The value is a cons cell,
7822 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7823where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7824the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7825input to the subprocess.
7826
7827**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7828change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7829
7830** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7831customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7832you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7833
7834You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7835variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7836information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7837legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7838customization.
7839
7840Thus, instead of writing
7841
7842 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7843 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7844
7845you would now write this:
7846
7847 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7848 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7849 :type 'boolean
7850 :group foo)
7851
7852The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7853two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7854describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7855for a description of them.
7856
7857The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7858should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7859
7860 (defgroup ispell nil
7861 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7862 :group 'processes)
7863
7864The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7865group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7866but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7867to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7868second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7869
7870Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7871package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7872have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7873package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7874first-level subgroups.
7875
7876** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7877
7878This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7879separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7880
7881** easy-mmode
7882
7883The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7884developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7885only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7886predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7887`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7888`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7889
7890** Text property changes
7891
7892*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7893text property.
7894
7895*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7896previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7897place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7898functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7899starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7900
7901If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7902LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7903of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7904position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7905
7906*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7907value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7908is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7909
7910** Changes in invisibility features
7911
7912*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7913hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7914is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7915should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7916would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7917make the overlay visible.
7918
7919During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7920invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7921needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7922which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7923the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7924t when it should hide it.
7925
7926*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7927
7928Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7929invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7930and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7931Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7932manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7933Here is an example of how to do this:
7934
7935 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7936 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7937 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7938 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7939
7940 ...
7941 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7942
7943 ...
7944 ;; When done with the overlays:
7945 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7946 ;; Or respectively:
7947 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7948
7949** Changes in syntax parsing.
7950
7951*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7952`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7953obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7954`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7955
7956If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7957is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7958used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7959
7960When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7961character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7962
7963 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7964 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7965
7966 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7967 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7968 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7969
7970 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7971 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7972 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7973 determine the syntax type of the character.
7974
7975 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7976 of the current buffer.
7977
7978*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7979value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7980for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7981
7982*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7983and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7984only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7985character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7986another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7987
7988These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7989text property.
7990
7991*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7992arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7993of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7994
7995*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7996(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7997element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7998nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7999string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8000
8001*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8002syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8003`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8004
8005** Changes in face features
8006
8007*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8008if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8009
8010*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8011of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8012
8013*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8014set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8015
8016*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8017set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8018
8019*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8020by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8021and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8022the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8023overlay property).
8024
8025This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8026arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8027
8028** Changes in file-handling functions
8029
8030*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8031directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8032they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8033is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8034
8035This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8036begins with ~.
8037
8038*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8039it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8040
8041*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8042the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8043
8044*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8045as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8046
8047*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8048character code conversion as well as other things.
8049
8050Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8051(formerly it did not).
8052
8053*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8054environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8055
8056*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8057instead of constant strings.
8058
8059*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8060to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8061any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8062
8063substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8064in the same way as before.
8065
8066*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8067The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8068which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8069
8070*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8071error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8072else, and returns nil.
8073
8074*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8075directory cannot be listed.
8076
8077** Changes in minibuffer input
8078
8079*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8080read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8081additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8082argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8083ways:
8084
8085 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8086 It is available through the history command M-n.
8087
8088*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8089read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8090argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8091minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8092enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8093
8094In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8095argument in this way.
8096
8097*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8098from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8099minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8100
8101** Echo area features
8102
8103*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8104echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8105minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8106after the echo area is cleared.
8107
8108*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8109in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8110
8111** Keyboard input features
8112
8113*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8114set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8115
8116*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8117received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8118by keyboard macros.
8119
8120** Frame-related changes
8121
8122*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8123creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8124hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8125
8126*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8127the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8128has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8129
8130*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8131selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8132value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8133in the selected frame.
8134
8135*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8136is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8137which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8138
8139** X Windows features
8140
8141*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8142x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8143x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8144
8145*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8146The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8147
8148*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8149MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8150A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8151
8152If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8153it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8154
8155** Subprocess features
8156
8157*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8158functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8159automatically.
8160
8161*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8162and returns the output from the command as a string.
8163
8164*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8165and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8166
8167** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8168does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8169
8170** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8171at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8172goes after the other menu items.
8173
8174** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8175of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8176around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8177are in use.
8178
8179The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8180series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8181
8182Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8183after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8184form.
8185
8186** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8187is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8188but its hook is still run.
8189
8190** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8191for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8192
8193If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8194regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8195useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8196
8197This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8198are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8199filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8200warned.
8201
8202** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8203way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8204
8205** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8206integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8207functions like display-time.
8208
8209** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8210name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8211
8212** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8213can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8214is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8215
8216** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8217if there is an error in compilation.
8218
8219** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8220switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8221argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8222they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8223
8224** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8225Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8226the *scratch* buffer.
8227
8228** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8229The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8230where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8231e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8232
8233** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8234and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8235It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8236
8237** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8238using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8239variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8240and compose-mail-other-frame.
8241
8242** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8243can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8244full name of the specified user will be returned.
8245
8246** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8247of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8248where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8249in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8250option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8251files at all.
8252
8253** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8254and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8255width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8256the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8257
8258For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8259minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8260with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8261is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8262
8263** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8264
8265** imenu.el changes.
8266
8267You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8268item from menu created by imenu.
8269
8270An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8271#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8272select one of those items.
8273\f
8274* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8275\f
8276* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8277
8278** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8279mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8280
8281** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8282use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8283Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8284\f
8285* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8286
8287** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8288To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8289
8290** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8291conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8292matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8293expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8294word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8295all caps.
8296
8297** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8298at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8299
8300When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8301does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8302as in previous Emacs versions.
8303
8304** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8305non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8306time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8307frames.
8308
8309** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8310if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8311This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8312Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8313accident.
8314
8315** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8316keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8317It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8318line and then executing the macro.
8319
8320This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8321
8322** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8323(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8324characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8325characters.
8326
8327** Font Lock mode
8328
8329*** Font Lock support modes
8330
8331Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8332below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8333hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8334to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8335Font Lock mode is enabled.
8336
8337For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8338
8339 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8340
8341in your ~/.emacs.
8342
8343*** lazy-lock
8344
8345The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8346only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8347becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8348Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8349occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8350buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8351Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8352
8353To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8354
8355 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8356
8357To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8358
8359** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8360
8361*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8362paren and key.
8363
8364*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8365supported.
8366
8367** Gnus changes.
8368
8369Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8370commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8371significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8372previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8373
8374Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8375between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8376
8377*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8378variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8379obsolete.
8380
8381*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8382missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8383
8384 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8385
8386*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8387
8388 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8389
8390*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8391referred.
8392
8393*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8394
8395 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8396
8397*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8398
8399 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8400
8401*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8402buffers.
8403
8404 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8405
8406*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8407
8408 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8409
8410*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8411
8412 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8413
8414*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8415
8416 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8417
8418*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8419is possible.
8420
8421 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8422
8423*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8424groups of groups.
8425
8426*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8427
8428*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8429batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8430
8431*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8432
8433*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8434
8435*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8436
8437 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8438
8439*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8440expiration times.
8441
8442*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8443
8444*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8445process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8446
8447*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8448articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8449bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8450
8451*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8452articles with the `*' command.
8453
8454*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8455
8456*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8457
8458 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8459
8460*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8461
8462*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8463`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8464
8465*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8466buffer.
8467
8468*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8469
8470*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8471
8472*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8473
8474 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8475
8476*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8477
8478 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8479
8480*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8481
8482*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8483
8484*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8485
8486 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8487 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8488
8489*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8490refetching.
8491
8492 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8493
8494*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8495buffer to allow easier treatment.
8496
8497*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8498
8499*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8500
8501 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8502
8503*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8504articles.
8505
8506 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8507
8508*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8509
8510*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8511cited text to hide is now customizable.
8512
8513 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8514
8515*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8516
8517 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8518
8519*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8520
8521*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8522
8523The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8524in greater detail.
8525\f
8526* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8527
8528** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8529second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8530asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8531exists.
8532
8533** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8534as well as lists.
8535
8536** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8537of a given keymap.
8538
8539** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8540given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8541keymap or nil.
8542
8543** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8544an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8545name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8546menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8547equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8548alias.
8549\f
8550* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8551
8552** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8553
8554Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8555This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8556was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8557far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8558pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8559
8560For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8561you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8562`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8563
8564** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8565
8566The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8567do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8568It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8569much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8570chapter of the manual for details.
8571
8572However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8573customization variables take effect.
8574
8575** Marking with the mouse.
8576
8577When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8578highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8579using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8580
8581** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8582
8583*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8584
8585*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8586to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8587
8588*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8589in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8590you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8591application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8592applications, these problems are significant.
8593
8594If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8595likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8596However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8597will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8598other DOS application as a subprocess.
8599
8600Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8601You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8602
8603If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8604subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8605have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8606Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8607separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8608Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8609
8610** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8611
8612This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8613which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8614minibuffer contains.
8615
8616** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8617
8618The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8619It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8620It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8621affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8622
8623The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8624it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8625and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8626when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8627
8628** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8629enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8630
8631** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8632F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8633Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8634
8635If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8636menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8637something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8638the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8639
8640 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8641
8642** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8643to replace the characters it "deletes".
8644
8645** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8646
8647** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8648a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8649select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8650It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8651immediately after the selected one.
8652
8653This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8654made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8655
8656** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8657
8658Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8659directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8660If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8661Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8662recover-session.
8663
8664You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8665auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8666will not work.
8667
8668Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8669normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8670this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8671bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8672now that the bug is fixed.
8673
8674** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8675
8676There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8677when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8678Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8679which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8680
8681If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8682telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8683VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8684the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8685
8686** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8687Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8688is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8689
8690There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8691Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8692enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8693The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8694remain normal.
8695
8696** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8697header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8698
8699Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8700known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8701offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8702Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8703
8704Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8705of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8706a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8707name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8708documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8709`mail-directory-stream'.)
8710
8711** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8712skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8713characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8714with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8715
8716Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8717- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8718wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8719
8720The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8721less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8722headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8723Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8724Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8725fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8726to a limitation in font-lock).
8727
8728External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8729
8730** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8731buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8732buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8733this example:
8734
8735 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8736 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8737
8738** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8739
8740*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8741
8742*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8743
8744*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8745
8746*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8747entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8748will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8749isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8750(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8751The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8752
8753*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8754does the same job.
8755
8756*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8757"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8758
8759*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8760text.
8761
8762** Font Lock mode
8763
8764*** Global Font Lock mode
8765
8766Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8767new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8768font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8769turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8770on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8771
8772For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8773
8774 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8775
8776in your ~/.emacs.
8777
8778*** Local Refontification
8779
8780In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8781However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8782those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8783command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8784
8785In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8786(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8787current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8788above and below point.
8789
8790With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8791
8792** Follow mode
8793
8794Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8795buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8796side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8797they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8798split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8799follow-mode.
8800
8801M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8802
8803To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8804command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8805
8806** hide-show changes.
8807
8808The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8809to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8810normal hooks.
8811
8812** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8813The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8814
8815** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8816recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8817those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8818
8819** MSDOS Changes
8820
8821*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8822Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8823
8824*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8825and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8826
8827*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8828
8829*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8830pressing both mouse buttons.
8831
8832*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8833restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8834are:
8835
8836**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8837now works.
8838
8839**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8840
8841**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8842implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8843
8844**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8845
8846**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8847
8848**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8849
8850**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8851
8852**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8853\f
8854* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8855
8856** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8857tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8858remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8859this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8860behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8861
8862** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8863
8864The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8865not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8866need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8867be different.
8868
8869It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8870than `system-type'.
8871
8872See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8873
8874** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8875now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8876
8877** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8878that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8879
8880** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8881no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8882reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8883
8884The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8885to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8886like this:
8887
8888 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8889
8890SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8891It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8892becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8893
8894REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8895seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8896means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8897
8898*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8899up if too much time passes.
8900
8901 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8902
8903This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8904If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8905of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8906form in BODY.
8907
8908*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8909a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8910call looks like this:
8911
8912 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8913
8914SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8915runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8916timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8917ARGS.
8918
8919Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8920command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8921command.
8922
8923REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8924time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8925does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8926each time Emacs becomes idle.
8927
8928If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8929idle for SECS seconds.
8930
8931*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8932all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8933programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8934instead.
8935
8936*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8937there is no answer within a certain time.
8938
8939 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8940
8941asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8942within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8943Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8944
8945** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8946arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8947meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8948arguments in between are ignored.
8949
8950This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8951the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8952
8953** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8954/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8955/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8956site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8957version.
8958
8959It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8960version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8961for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8962has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8963and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8964problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8965
8966** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8967.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8968systems with limited file name syntax.
8969
8970Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8971convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8972for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8973completions.el:
8974
8975(defvar save-completions-file-name
8976 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8977 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8978
8979This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8980depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8981convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8982Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8983MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8984
8985** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8986rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8987minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8988
8989** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8990marker from its buffer position.
8991
8992** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8993Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8994The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8995
8996** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8997that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8998condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8999of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9000matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9001regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9002
9003This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9004errors that happen often during editing.
9005
9006** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9007into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9008puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9009
9010** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9011now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9012
9013** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9014a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9015name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9016to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9017and not get-buffer-window.
9018
9019** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9020calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9021being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9022
9023If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9024buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9025property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9026non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9027are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9028property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9029over and over for the same text.
9030
9031** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9032
9033*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9034in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9035
9036;; @(#) HEADER: text
9037;; $HEADER: text $
9038
9039in addition to the normal
9040
9041;; HEADER: text
9042
9043*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9044checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9045lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9046
9047
a933dad1 9048\f
3787e12e 9049* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9050
9051----------------------------------------------------------------------
9052Copyright information:
9053
424d8b44 9054Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9055
9056 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9057 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9058 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9059 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9060
9061 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9062 of this document, or of portions of it,
9063 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9064 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9065\f
9066Local variables:
9067mode: outline
9068paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9069end: